Documente Academic
Documente Profesional
Documente Cultură
PHYSICS
[XII TOPIC]
Copyright © reserved with Motion IIT JEE and Publications
All rights reserved. No part of this work herein should be reproduced or used either
graphically, electronically, mechanically or by recording, photocopying, taping, web
distributing or by storing in any form and retrieving without the prior written permission of
the publisher. Anybody violating this is liable to be legally prosecuted.
TOPICS COVERED
1. Geometrical Optics
2. Wave optics
3. Electrostatics - 1
4. Electrostatics - 2
5. Current Electricity
6. Capacitance
7. Magnetism
8. E.M.I.
9. Alternating Current
Electrostatics - 1 ..................................................................................................................................... 58 to 87
Exercise - I .................................................................................................................................................. 58 – 63
Exercise - II ................................................................................................................................................. 64 – 70
Exercise - III ................................................................................................................................................. 71 – 81
Exercise - IV ............................................................................................................................................... 82 – 87
394 - Rajeev Gandhi Nagar Kota, Ph. No. 0744-2209671, 93141-87482, 93527-21564
www. motioniitjee.com , email-info@motioniitjee.com
Geometrical Optics 5
GEOMETRICAL OPTICS
1. B
All the reflected rays meet at a point, when
produced backwards.
2. A 8. C
A plane mirror forms inverted image of
object line perpendicular to it. k
Maximum velocity of the insect is A . Its
m
component perpendicular to the mirror is
k
A sin60 . Thus, max. relative speed =
m
3 : 25 8 : 35
Object Image
3 k
A .
2 m
3. D
9. B
Deviation produced by plane mirror is given
Perpendicular distance between object &
by
mirror is equal to perpendicular distance
= 180 – 2i
between image & mirror.
here i = 90 – 60 = 30º
Initially the separation between object and
= 180 – 60 = 120º
image is 200 cm. After 6s the mirror has
moved 30 cm towards the object. Hence
4. A
object-mirror separation i s 70 cm. So
T he re i s a phas e change of 180º i n
object image separation is 140 cm.
reflection.
10. B
5. C
From the following figure we can see that
Only a portion of incident light is reflected
incident & reflected ray are parallel to one
by mirror and rest is transmitted in mid
another.
water. So intensity of reflected light is less
st
than intensity of incident light & hence I mirror
Incident
image formed is less bright. ray
6. A
Reflected
By the laws of reflection angle of incidence ray
= angle of reflection
i = r nd
II mirror
7. C
Perpendicular distance between object & 11. A
mirror is equal to perpendicular distance By the formula for the number of image formed
between image & mirror. 360
Fig.1 shows original condition when object 1 where is angle between the mirror..
distance is x & mirror is at mean and fig.2
shows final condition then mirror perform SHM 360
No. of images = 1 5
of amplitude 2 cm.
www.motion.ac.in
6 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
12. B 18. D
A
45º
B B'
90º 60
D C
10cm
1 1 1
=
v u f f
20cm
Here u = –f, f = +f
Here f = +20
1 1 1 u = 20
O
v (f ) f f
1 1 1 1
=0
f v 20 20 v
v =
2 v=
15. D
Here u = –30 cm, f = –15 cm 20. B
object is at centre of curvature
image will be real and of same size.
16. A f=+f
2F
By using mirror formula
u = +x; f = –f
1 1 1 Taking u = – 2f & f = +f
v f x 1 1 1
1 1 (x f) v u f
= = –ve (always)
v v xf 1 1 1
so if object virtual, image always real.
v 2f f
1 1 1 21
17. A = + =
When object is real then image move from v f 2f 2f
focus to pole. v 2f / 3 1
So maximum distance f = 20 cm. m=– = =
u 2f 3
21. B 25. A
Magnification is –3 because image is real &
inverted. i
v
m= rr
u
v e
–3 =
u
Incident angle and emergent angle will be
v = 3u. same.
20cm
given u = –20 cm
the angle between them is 0.
v = –60 cm
By using mirror formula
1 1 1 26. C
– = i = 60º
60 20 f
f = –15 cm Displacement = t sec r sin (i – r) = 5 2
3 sin r
22. D
= 15 sec r 2 cos r 2 = 5 3
Focal length of the mirror is R/2 which
depends on the sphere from which the mirror
is cut out. 3 tan r 1
2 2 3
23. C
Velocity of light varies with medium. The r = 30º
relation between velocity & refractive index Now sin r = sin i
is given as 3 1
= × = 3
n2 v2 2 2
n1
= v1
Where n is refractive index & v velocity of 27. D
light in medium. Both false as critical angle is greater for red
colour (C ) and diamond shines due to
sin i H2 V1 1 TIR.
= H = V
sin r 1 2 2
28. D
24. B As sin = constant, the angle of emergence
will be 90°.
29. D
As the ray moves towards the normal while
60º 60º
entering medium 2 from 1 we have n2>n1
for total internal reflection at interface of 2
3 & 3 , n2>n3 besides n3 should also be less
than n2 or else ray would have emerged in
medium 3, parallel to its path in medium 1
hence n3<n1<n2
www.motion.ac.in
8 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
31. C 36. C
8
We know that formula for deviation
A V 2.5 10 =i + e–A & r1 + r2 = A
B 1.25
B VA 2 10 8 i=i r2 = 0 r1 + 0 = A
e=0 r1 = A A
1 4 A= A
C = sin–1 = sin–1 1 sin i = sin A
1.25 5 i r
Because angles
rarer are small i = A
[As C = sin–1 ]
denser
37. B
For minimum deviation imin = e
32. A
A
and r1 = = r2 = r
2
= i + e – A = 2 (imin – r) = 38º ... (1)
45º 30º
Now
45º 30º 44º = 42º + 62 – 2r r = 30º ... (2)
From (1) and (2)
270º imin = 49º
1
= sin 30º
C
C <
sin C < sin
1 1
40º i=e 50º
2
> 2. 39. D
All are true.
35. C
i – e = 23 ....(1) 40. D
23 = i + e – 60° i +e = 83 ....(2) 1 1
From equation (1) & (2) We know that C sin
glass
e = 30° & i =53°
and glass depends on wavelength of light
1. sin 53° = sin r ....(3)
sin (60 – r) = sin 30 ....(4) 1
glass
After solving eq (3) & (4) we get
When is minimum the will be maximum
2 sin53 & hence C will be minimum.
= 1.13 is minimum for voilet hence C is minimum
for voilet light.
43
=
5
394-Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota
Geometrical Optics 9
41. B 46. A
Using formula R = 20cm
nv nR n nR
= n 1 ny = v
y 2 t=20 cm
1.56 1.44 1.56 1.44 Paper
= ny = = 1.5
1.5 1 2 This problem can be drawn as follows
0.12 R = 20cm
= = 0.24
0. 5 air
42. B
Disp. (nv-nR) A t = 20cm
45 B n = 1.33 n = 1.5
n1=2 n2=2
2cm x y
10cm
u = –10 R = + 20 cm
2 1 2 1
v 40cm Image is always virtual because rays goes
v 10 20
so virtual image is formed from rarer to denser medium.
1 40
hi = 2
2 10
hi =4 cm so erect, enlarged
www.motion.ac.in
10 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
49. D 52. C
We know that P = IA & P × t = E
1 1 1
E 1
Hence IA = f R1 R 2
t
For double convex lens
2
d d2I R1 = R
Initially energy/sec = I × R2 = -2R
2 4
=2
2 2
d d 1 2 1 1
Now energy/sec = I 1
2 4 50 R 2
R = 75 cm = R1
3 R2 = 150 cm
= Id2
16
53. D
Final Ιntensity I d2 3 / 16 3 On cutting the less parallel to its principal
So, Now axis
Initial Intensity Id2 / 4 4 f does not changes
Focus will not change. so P will not change.
50. B 54. C
100 cm = R
Kh u1
Ku1
1 1 1
( 1)
Kh f R R
h 1 2
1 1 1 1
u2 Ku2 = =
2 100 200
f = 200 cm
For case 1
55. A
u = –u1 v = –ku1 f = –f
We know that on cutting the lens into two
1 1 1 parts perpendicular to its principal axis power
ku1
+ u = ......... (1) of the two parts will be P/2 each. Let initial
1 f power of lens be P.
For case 2 Then (P1)f = (P2)f = P/2
u = –u2 v = ku2 f = –f Pf = (P1)f = (P2)f = P Pi = Pf
No change in power hence no change in focal
1 1 1
– + = ......... (2) length.
ku2 u2 f
On solving (1) & (2) 56. A
Given RA = 0.9 RB
1 1 1
f= (u1 + u2)
2 fA fB
2 2
51. B (1.63 – 1) R = (xB – 1) R
B convex mirror A B
57. A 60. A
The convex lenses and the plane mirror are
1
Using the formula P = f in m shown in figure. The combination behaves
like a concave mirror. Let the distance of te
p1 = 2D object from the first lens be x.
For the ray to retrace its path. It should be
100
f1 = = +50 cm incident normally on the plane mirror.
2
From the diagram, we see that for lens L2
f2 = –10
v = , f = +10 cm, u = ?
f2 = –100 cm
1 1 1 Y Y
feq f1 f2
I1
1 1 2 1 1
= = =
50 100 100 100 O X X
feq = 100 cm L2 L2
x 30
58. C
From the lens equation, we get
1 1 1 f 15cm
,
v f u 40cm 1 1 1
or u = – 10 cm
v u f
1 1 1
, v = +24 cm From the diagram, we see that for lens L1
v 40 15
v = 30 – 10 = 20 cm, f = +10 cm, u= – x
This image acts as object for lens L2 From the lens equations, we get
So, u = + ( 2 4 –14) = +10 cm,
v = 30 cm 1 1 1 1 1 1
or or x = 20 cm
v u f 20 x 10
f=?
1 1 1 1 1 1 61. C
f v u f 30 10 4
y = x = x
f = – 15 cm 3
4
For the mirror, u = –y = x
59. C 3
1 1 1 O
3 1 2 1 3 2
v u f y
v u R1 R2 x
1 3 1
5 5 3 v 4x 30
1 , 2 , 3
4 3 2 60x
v
R1 = 10 cm, R2 = – 10 cm 2x 45
Let the final image is formed at a distance z
3/ 2 5/ 4 5/ 3 5/ 4 3/ 2 5/3 from the mirror, then
v 10 10
60x 1 4 z
2x 45 z 3 and =2 (magnification)
x
180
v cm Solving, we get x = 33.75 cm
7
www.motion.ac.in
12 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
62. D 64. C
Ray diagram : The path of a typical light ray
uf 30 20
is shown in the follwoing figure. The element v 60cm
encountered is only a lens in either path of u f 30 20
the light rays.
30 cm 60 cm
4 mm
O
2 mm
Screen 2 mm
The lens is cut in half along the axis. So,
both halves have the same focallength. Since 4 mm
two sharp images are formed on the screen,
t he res ul t i s e qui v al ent to t he l ens
displacement method with D = 80 cm and d
= 12 cm. v h2 vh1 60 2
For the lens displacement method, the focal m = u h h2 = 4 cm
1 u 30
length of the lens is given by
D2 d2 65. B
f or f = 19.55 cm
4D For normal adjustment
u0 D
63. B ×
u0 fe = – 100
For lens f1
f1 = 30 cm, u = 10 m
v D
f1 f2 1 0 ×
f0 fe = –100
25
(1 – 2V0) × f = – 100
e
I1 I2
1 – 2v0 = 4fe .....(1)
27.5 cm
Again L = V0 + fe = 6.5 .....(2)
30 cm from (1) & (2)
v = 30 cm 6fe = 12
f2 = 15cm, u = 2.5 cm fe = 2 cm
1 1 1 66. C
v 25 15 For seeing with relaxed eye, the final image
should be formed at For objective lens
1 1 1 1
v = 3 cm 1 1 1 0 200cm
v 15 2.5 3
v u0 f 0 ,
f 0 30cm
1 1 1
v0 200 30
600
So, v0 35.3 cm
17
Distance between objective and eyepiece is
L = v0 + fe = 35.3 + 3 = 38.3 cm
67. B 70. B
Power of liquid lens In this case, the total deviation is shared
between the two surfaces.
2 6
= (1.6–1) ×10 = 6 D
0.20 10
Power of concave lens
= –(1.5–1) = –0.5×10 D
Total power of two concave lenses = – 10 D
Power of system = –10 D + 6 D = – 4 D
1
Focal length = = –0.25 m
4
68. A
Here, fv = 2 cm and fe = 3 cm.
Using les formula for eyepiece,
1 1 1
u v1 fe
1 1 1
u1 = – 3cm [ i = 0]
u 3
But the distance between objective and
eyepiece is 15 cm (given).
Therefore, distance of image formed by the
objective, v = –15–3 = 12 cm. Let u be the
71. B
object distance from the objective, them for
By Theory
1 1 1 1 1 1
objectives lens u v f or 72. A
0 u 12 2
By Theory
1 1 1 5 12
u 2.4 cm
u 2 12 12 5 73. B
(a) is the correct option. fO
= 10
fe
69. B
f1 = + 40 cm 74. C
(for convex lens)= 0.4 m By Theory
f2 = – 25
(for concave lens) 75. B
= – 0.25 m p = 1/f = –0.5D
Therefore, focal length
(f) of the combination,
1 1 1
f f1 f2
1 1 0.25 0.4
0.40 0.25 0.40 0.25
0.15
1.5D
0.1
1
P= =–1.5D
f
(b) is the correct option.
www.motion.ac.in
14 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
1. C 4. D
A G A'
C 0.4 m
0.3 m
E'
1.5 m
E 1.5 m
D
7 : 34 : 23 0.8 m
VI V0 x 2x x 2x
We know that from formula Vm = = =
0.4 A 'E ' 0.7 A 'F '
2
where Vm = Velocity of mirror A'E' = 0.8 A'F' = 1.4
Vm = Velocity of image Now A'F' - A'E' = E'F' = EF
Vm = Velocity of object 1.4 – 0.8 = 0.6 = EF
We can write velocity of image for first
mirror after Ist reflection 5. C
VI = 2 V
A C A'
For second reflection this velocity becomes 0.05m
0.1 m
velocity of object. E G
E'
I
2V VI Visible
–V= 1.5 m
portion
2 D
VI = – 4 V H 0.8 m H'
|VI| = 4 V
Thus after nth reflection B B'
VI = 2 N V
Let AB be the boy with his eye level at E and
3. A A'B' be the image then the visible portion is
By image formations . EID ~ EE'H'
EI EE '
=
L/3
ID E'H
| | Now we know that EE' = 2 EI, ID = 0.6 m &
• • • • • AH = A'H' = A'E' + E'H'
4L 2L L 5L
|
3 3 3 3
|
6. A
d
2 36 rad / s
dt
dy d
10 cos ec2
A dt dt
25
10 36 1000 m/s
9
O B
9. B
Component of velocity of object to mirror
Deviation at A = 180 – 2i1 (AC) follows the condition.
Deviation at B = 180 – 2i2 (AC)
VIM VOM for z component only
In OAB 90 – i1 + 90 – i2 + 60 = 180°
i1+i2 = 60° VI 8 5 8
Net deviation = 1 + 2
= 360 – 2 (i1 + i2) VI 11 k̂
= 360 – 2 × 60 = 240° The remaining components remain same as
From line BC
120o 60o that of the object so VI 3î 4 ĵ 11k̂
180 + = 240
= 60º 240
o
10. C
7. A
I
O 20m
C
30m
3m
S
300m
x
A 1m B
x 300 x hi 9 v
= =
20 100 h0 3 u
Let OI = x 3u = v
100x = 6000 + 20x 3 (x – 300) = x
80x = 6000
3x – 900 = x
600 2x = 900
x= cm x = 450 cm.
8
25 × 3
= 75 cm 11. D
OS = OI = 75 cm Given
hi h 1 v
8. C m= h = = =–
0 nh n u
u
v=–
n
Using mirror formula
n 1 1 n 1 1
10m –
u u f u f
9 u = –f(n – 1)
2 18 rad / s | u | = f(n – 1)
www.motion.ac.in
16 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
12. B 17. A
f
y
x
f
In convex mirror Image is not at infinity
()
13. B
y 4 dy 4 dx
= 8 m/sec
x 3 dt 3 dt
C 18. D
For II reflection
nd =–2c
Minimum value of = 45º
=–2i
= –c i
2 i)–
–1 (n
sin
n
14. B =
si
i
Using mirror formula i=0 i=i i=90
1 1 1
= 19. D
v u f
The equation is in the form of y = mx + c. c
c cos =cos
1 n
On comparing we see that taking on y-
v n cos = cos
1 1 sin = n sin
axis and on x-axis than m (slope) is –1
u sin 2
1 \ n2 cos2 + 1
and is intercept on y-axis. n2
f
C
1 c cos air
v
c glass
cos
n
C/n
1/u sin 2
n2 – n2 sin2 + 1
1 1 1
n2
v u f
1 2 2
sin2 2 n 1 n
15. D n
n2 1 n 2
16. C sin2 = n
Real depth = d = 1m
1 n2
Virtual depth = d’ = 0.9m n 1
d' 1 sin = 2
1 n
d
tan = n]
1 10
= =
0.9 9
20. A 24. B
4 5
w , g
3 3 A
1 4
sin C =
w r
w g g 5 c
1 4
C sin (A)
5 From properties of prism
r+C=A
21. C
1
r = A – C = 75 – sin–1 = 30º
2
1.sin i = 2 sin r
1
53° i = sin–1 2
2
i = 45º
1
sin C =
1.4
C = 45.58 25. A
For TIR to take place > C.
= 1 – 2 = 0
22. C
Using formula for relation between min & A. (1 – 1)A1 – (2 – 1)A2 = 0
www.motion.ac.in
18 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
28. A 31. D
n2 = 4/3 2 1 2 1
n1 = 3/2
v x R
x O y 32. C
• •
1 1 1
x p ( 1)
... (1)
f R1 R2
1 1
4 3 Now p' = 1 R R ... (2)
n2 = , n1 = 0 1 2
3 2
R = –10 cm u = –x p' 0
4 3 4 /3 3 /2 p 0 ( 1)
3v 2x 10
33. B
1 3 1 3
v
v 4 60 2x m = –0.5 =
u
for real image v > 0
u
3 1 3 v=– = +5cm
> 0 x > 90 cm 2
4 60 2x
1 1 1 2 1
=
29. D f 5 10 10
10
10cm f= cm convex lens.
3
4
3
34. B
7.5cm
5cm
dv v2
2
du u
1 1 1
v = 30cm
for Ist Refraction v 10 15
4 2
u1 = –7.5 cm n1 =1.5, n2 = 30
3 dv = – du
R = –5cm 15
dv = –4mm
4 / 3 1.5 4 / 3 1.5
v1 7.5 5
35. B
v1 = –8cm
for 2nd Refraction
2=1 1 = 4/3
u2 = –(10 + 8) = –18 cm
1
so apparent depth = (18) 27 cm
4 /3 2 15cm 10cm 20cm
30. C
30cm
c
Ray retraces its path when it appears to
come towards centre of curvature
R = 20
c
x F = 10 cm
For ray to retrace its path it must fall nor-
3 mally on mirror.
sin c = c 60
2
x=R
394-Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota
Geometrical Optics 19
36. C
v 200 / 3 1
m0 =
v u 200 3
m=3= v = 3u
u Image I1 acts as an object for eye lens.
u = –10cm v = +30 cm Here, v = –25 cm, f = 5cm
1 1 1 1 1 1
+ = f f v u
30 10 eq
1 1 1 1 1 15
30
feq = cm f2 = –30 u v f 25 5 25
4
25
1 1 1 1 1 4 u cm
6
feq = f1 f2 = f1 30 = 30
And magnification produced by eye lens.
f1 = 6 cm
v 25
me 6
u (25 / 6)
37. B
Let the object distance be x, Then, the image 40. B
distance is D–x. 1 1
From lens equation, ve
f1 f2
1 1 1
x Dx f 1 2 1 2
0 f f
On algebraic rearrangement, we get f1 f2 1 2
x2 – Dx + Df = 0 2 < 1 | f2 | < | f1 |
On solving for x, we get
D D(D 4f) 41. A
x1 By Theory
2
www.motion.ac.in
20 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
hmax = 320 cm
160 cm
G
4. A,B
v
Given 2 v = ±2
u
B B' 1 1 1
from
Using similar EHG & EE ' B' v u f
1 1 1
EE' EH ±
2u u f
E' B' HG
after solving u = –30, –10 cm
EE' = 2EH & E'B' = 160 cm
HG = 80 cm 5. B,C
FH = 5 cm
Hence length of mirror required is FG = 85
cm and bottom of mirror should be 80 cm
or less above the ground or else feet will B' A' A B A'' B''
not be visible.
30 10 10 30 10
2. B,D
Field of view is same for all positions of the 50
mirror and hence spot on wall remains for A’ u = –60 f = 60 v = +30
unaffected for B’ u = –90 f = 60 v = +36 cm
Image length = 6cm
fov.
s 1
Magnification =
5
s2
6. B,C
hi v
s1 Using mirror formula h =
0 u
hi 1 v
Given h = =
0 2 u
u
3. A,B,D hence v =
2
given
u = –40 v = 20
Using mirror formula
B 1 1 1
Q 40 20 f
hmin hma x 1 1
= f = 40
p f 40
I M S A
convex mirror with focal length = 40 cm
use similar traingles
8. A,D
Shift by a glass slab of thickness t is given 12. A,C
1 5 4
by t 1 sin30º = sin2
3 3 60°
And shift is towards the path of incident 5 60°
light. 2 = sin–1 60°
8
30°
5
9. A,B,C .sin60º = sin 90º
The object will now O' 3 30°
appear to be placed at C 5
O' which is a poi nt I =
between C & for 2 3
mirror. So image is
formed 13. A,C
between C & O. = (– 1) A A & – 1
10. B,C,D
For critical angle 14. B,C,D
2 A for min deviation there are two angles of
sin C = incidence
1
c
3 B i = e so r1 = r2
90º – C > sin–1 c
1 C i = 90º or e = 90º for max
3 D min = ( – 1)A
90-C
cos C >
1
15. A,B,C
12 12 3
A have di spersi on wi thout average
12 12 23 ... (B) deviation.
2 2 2
1 3 2
... (C) B have deviation without dispersion.
2
2 2
... (D) C have dispersion and average deviation.
1 2 3
www.motion.ac.in
22 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
17. A,C
6 cm
• • x y
P P
1
x (y – x)
v 20
Magnification, m1 u 20 1
I1 O I2 I3
Image is real and inverted, same size as
object .
www.motion.ac.in
24 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
1. 4nR
If a mirror rotates through an angle , the
B
image rotates through an angle 2. There-
fore, the linear speed of the light spot is
v = 2 R = 2 R (2 n) = 4 n R
A
2. 3d C
From ABC
Refer to figure. It is clear that the greatest
+ + 90 + = 180
distance is AB. Now, since PR = RD = L, from
3 = 90
triangles PRT and PBD we have
= 30º
B
5. circle
All the images formed by two plane.
T Mirror inclined to each other form images
which lie on a circle.
P D
R
6. 120° anticlockwise and 240° clockwise.
d O
S
o
30 30o
C
Q
A
= 180 – 2i angle of incidence
d = 180 – 2(30)
BD = 2RT = 2RS = 2× =d
2 = 120º anticlockwise
= 180 + 2(30)
d
and OD = . Therefore. OB = OD + BD = 240º clockwise.
2
d 3d 7. Due to turning of incident ray by 10º reflected
d
2 2 ray also gets turned by 10° anticlockwise
Due to turning of mirror by 20º ray gets
3d turned by 40° (2) clockwise.
AB = 2OB = 2× =3d.
2 Angle turned by reflected ray = 40 – 10
= 30 clockwise
3. first
8. Positioin of image = (1 cos 60°, –1 sin
60º 60°), Velocity of image=1 cos 60° i ,
30º
Parallel to
II
60º 30º Mirror 1 +1 sin 60° j m / s
M
30º 30º
Parallel to
Mirror 2
60º 60º 60º
I
1 30o
O
4. = 30° v2
x
v2
The ray will retrace its path if it falls nor-
I
mally on the mirror i.e. at third reflection
angle of incidence is 0.
Co-ordinate of image
= (1 cos60°, – 1 sin 60°)
www.motion.ac.in
26 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
Y M 12. 0
Minimum distance between object and image
is zero when image concides with the object
i.e., object is placed at 2F.
i 30o 13. 10 cm
O
60°
x f = – 10 cm. For end A, vA = –15 cm.
1 1 1
Using v u f , we have
A A
Resultant velocity . of 1
1 1 1
| v | 2 cos2 60 1sin2 60 vA = – 30 cm
v A 15 10
1/2 1
tan The negative sign shows that the image A’
3 /2 3 of end A is at a distance of 30 cm to the left
In ˆˆ
i.j form of P [see Figure]
v 1cos 60ˆi 1sin60ˆj m/s
O I
9. x=2 A' B A P
30 cm
10. 20 m
Irrespective of the type of mirror. For end B, uB = – 20 cm. Thus
1 1 1
4 vB = – 20 cm
11. ms-1 vB 20 10
9
The negative sign shown that the image B’
The side view mirror of a car is a convex
of end B is at a distance of 20 cm to the left
mirror, Given f = +10 m and u = –50 cm. of P, i.e.., B’ coincides with B. This is ex-
1 1 1 pected because (since R = 2f = 20 cm), B is
Using these values in , we have at the centre of curvature of the mirror. The
v u f
length of the image of rod AB is
1 1 1 50 A’B’ = 30 – 20 = 10 cm
v=+ m
v 50 10 6
14. 20 cm
1 1 1 The apparent depth of the object is (See
Differentiating with respect to t, figure)
v u f
1 dv 1 du
we have 0 O
v2 dt u2 dt
6cm
dv v2 du
2
dt u dt
14cm
dv v2 du 24cm
or 2
dt u dt | 32cm
2
v |'
Speed of image = × speed of am-
u2
bulance (object)
(50 / 6)2 4
16 ms1
(50)2 9 Object
1 1 1
v2 = +20 cm
v 2 20 10 Fish
Now for M1 R
tan C = ...... (1)
v1 12
m1 = – u A ray of light intering at 90º from rarer me-
1 dium makes an angle of refaction equal to
v2 critical angle in the denser medium and criti-
For M2 m2 = – u
2 cal angle is given by
v1 v 2 3
Total MT = m1 × m2 = C = sin–1
u1 u2 4
(60)(20) 3
= MT = +2 C = tan–1 ...... (2)
(30)(20) 7
Equation (1) & (2)
v I1
O v
M1
I1 will behave as an object for M2. Hence
dv v 2 du
2
dt u dt
Image will go towards right.
www.motion.ac.in
28 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
30°
60°
135°
15° r
i = 30 n=2
t r = 15
20. 23. r' r' > c
d 1 / cos15
T
v 3 108 / ice 24. 2cm
c
2 sin 30
T 108 sec ice sin15
3
3.2 / 2 4
tanc
2 5
Apparent depth 1 4 1 41
21. sinc
real depth n1 41 4
h 3
40 4 (90–r)
h = 30 cm
r
25.
2 2
22. sin n n
1 2
27. 38°
90
29. 60°
n1 = 1, n2 = 2, A = 90°, r2 = 60°
r1 = 30
1 sin c = 2 tan 30°
x
x1 x2 sin i = 1
In the graph for angle of deiration v/s angle i = 90°
of incidence the shift in angle of incidence
on right side is more than that of left side x2 30. red
> x1. Hence only one angle is sutable e = From the formula
38º. Appartent depth nair
Re al depth nglass
28. 30°
nair
Apparent depth = Real depth x
nglass
60º
The letter which appear least raised has
maximum Apparent depth and hence it has
i r1 r2 minimum for glass.
1
for to be minimum should be maximum
which is for Red.
For light be transmitted the ray should not
suffer TIR at second refraction. Hence 1.68 1.56
r2 < C. 31. (a) =
1.6 1
If maximum value of r2 is less than C then = 0.20
the ray will be always transmitted (b) = (1.68 –1.56)6
r1 + r2 = A = 0.72°
(r2)max = 60º – (r1)min
For r1 to be minimum i should be minimum
32. = 1 –2 = 0
7 (y1 –1) A1 – (y2 –1) A2 = 0
sin (imin) = sin (r1)min
3 (1.62 – 1) 6 – (1.518–1) A2 = 0
In limiting case (r2)max = C
A2 = 7.2
sini min
C = 60 – sin–1
1 1 1 sini min r
60°
sin = 60 sin r 60°
33. 60°
sini 3
sin1 = 60 – sin–1
7
2r = 60° r = 30°
sini 3 3 1 3
= cos (sin–1 )– sin60° = sin30 = 3
2 7 2 7
7 3 2 3 R =30cm
sin i = 34. Let u = x n2 = 3/2
3 2 7 2 7 n1 = 4/3 v=
1 n2 n1 n n1 3/2
sin i = 1
2
i = 30º = 2 4/3
v u R A B
3 /2 4 /3 3 /2 4 /3
x 30
x = 240 cm away from surface
www.motion.ac.in
30 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
(b) 22 3 1
R
R 3
u = – V2
22 3 1
v = +r (b) Replace 1 3
R = +r 3 2 in above formula
n 1 n1
r r
f'=40cm
n = n–1 (only when n > > 1)
1.5 1 1.5 1
v1 30cm 15 cm
v1 10 10 Let x be the distance of point source from
for IInd Refraction mirror
u2 = –(–v + 20) = – 50cm for mirror v should be +(25–15) v = 10 cm
R2 = –10 cm So that image for mirror is made on the focus
n2 = 1 n1 = 1.5 of lens so that the rays emerge parallel from
1 1.5 1 1.5 lens.
v2 50 10 so now for mirror
100 1 1 1
v2 50cm from 2nd surface
53 10 x 40
40
37. –4.93 cm x 13.33 from mirror
3
1 1 42. 0.2 m
38. 1/f = (1.5 – 1)
20 30
0.5 43. Focus length = f cm
=
60
2 3
1 1 1 2
1 0.5
(3 2) feq f f f
f 60
feq = f/2
f 120cm, 24cm
m = –4 = v /u ( Real image)
hi v 4u = –v
39. ve (So v and u at opposite side
h0 u 1 1 1 p
Now
of lens) 4u u f / 2 100
So lens in b/w image and object p 5
object is real ( U = –12.5 cm)
100 4 12.5
image is real P = 10 D
It is a converging lens because it forms a
real image.
1 1 1 1 1
P= = +2D
v 15 10 f(in m) 0.5
v = 30 cm
from simiar triangle ABI and CDI 51. Here, f = 5 cm; D = 25 cm
3 d
d = 1 cm D 25
30 10 Now, M = 1 + =1+ = 1 + 5 =6
f 5
2
Area = cm
4
90
1 1 2 52. F cm
13
46. fe q fm fi
R
M = – f 1 f
ll
lllllllllllllllllllllll
We know that D = 25 cm
l ll
1
60 30
20 25
= 1.5 M = – 1.0 1 2.0
47 . Here, = 0.021 ; = 1.53 ; = 20×13.5 = 270
’ = 0.045 ; ’ = 1.65 ; A’ = 4.2°
For no dispersion, + ’’ = 0 54. 151.5 cm
or A (–1) + ’A’ (–1) = 0
fO
' A'( 1) 55. fe = 10
or A
( 1)
100
.045 4.2 (1.65 1) 56. P=–
40
0.021 (1.53 1)
= – 2.5 D
= –11.04°
www.motion.ac.in
32 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
1. 7
First reflection = 3 (d r r 2 d2 )
x
Second reflection = 3 2
Third reflection = 1
Total = 7 2d (d r r 2 d2 )
m 1
( d r ) r 2 d2 (d r r 2 d2 )
6L
2.
u (d r r 2 d2 ) (d r r 2 d2 )
( d r r 2 d2 ) ( d r r 2 d2 )
(d2 r2 ) 2d d2 r2 d2 r2
u M1 3L
(d r)2 (r2 d2 )
L
2d(d d2 r2 )
M2 2 rd
L
r2 r
L 2 2
r(d d r ) d d2 r 2
2L 2L
3L
dv v 2 du
4. 2 .
dt u dt
2
v 1
M1 moves on line parallel to the mirrors so VIM . Vom VI VM ( Vo Vm )
to find out where M2 will be able to see im- u 100
age of M1 we have to find the total length given VIM 1 cm / sec
where M1 is visible of M2 so rays originate
from M1 & after reflection meet at M2. By VM 20 m / sec
using similar triangles.
We find total visible length is equal to
20m/sec
(3L + 3L) = 6L.
Distance 6L h
Hence time duration will be = =
speed u h/10
1cm/sec
d x
3. m
x f=10m
1 1 2
( 2x d).r 2 (dx x 2 ) 1
dx x r 1 10 2 m / sec ( Vo – 20 m / sec)
100
2x 2 2x(r d) rd 0
v 0 21 m / sec
2
2 (r d) 4(r d) 8 rd v 1 1
x m v v 1
22 u f v f
dm dv
1 10 3 / sec
x dt dt . f
d
xR 2n2
5. n1
6. 1.5
3
10. 1. sin (90 ) sin r
2
6 6
7. x d/ 2 3
x d x cos sin r
2
4 / 3 sin i 1. sin r
90
4 d/2 d/2
3 d2 d2 90 – x
(10.67)2 62
4 4 r
17 ft
x
6 ft 6 ft
2
r sin r cos
11ft 3
x
i 90 – x > c
5 ft r c sin( r ) sin c
sin r cos cos r . sin 8 / 9
4 inch
d/2
d 2 9 4 cos2
cos 2 . sin 8 / 9
3 3
d 16 feet
8
9 4 cos 2 . sin 2 cos 2
3
dy
8. 4x y 2x 2 64 32
dx (9 4 cos 2 ) (1 cos 2 ) 4 cos 4 cos 2
9 3
tan 2 2 1 2x2
1 17 sec 2 21 2
cot 2 2 x cos 2 tan
2 21 17 17
1
sin sin 1 1/ 3
3 11. ( 1)A 1.25
u sin = sin 90° = 1 net = ( – 2A) + 2A( – 1)
=3 180 2A ( 1). 2A 180 6.5
9. sin–1 (tan r)
r + r’ = 90º r’ = (90 – r) 1 2A
1 sin r = 2 cos r
i 2A
2 i – 2A
i .2 A
r'
A 2
r r 13
8
2
tan r =
1
2
Critical angle = sin–1
1
= sin–1 (tan r)
www.motion.ac.in
34 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
Vy
14.
12.
u
120 cm Vy
u = – 30 f = 40 cm V = + 120 cm
Relative = 2 Vy
1 1 ( 1) dhi fh0 du
2 V f h0
Feq
n 30 60 hi .h0 dt 2
.
u (u f ) (u f ) dt
30 Vy =0.8 cm/sec Relative = 2Vy
Feq n
15. u=–d f=F
Ist Case
u = – 60 v = – 30 1 1 1 dF
V
V d F dF
n 30
Feq
dF
x d
dF
1 1
1.5
30 60 30 x
IInd Case
60 60
u v 30 f 30 cm
V
1 1 1
60 60 30
30
d2 2dF
2 2 4 0 5 1
dF
1 1 1
u ( V 2x ) f F V V 2x F
13. 2/3 d 1
u=
v=? 1 1 1
n2 = 3/2 V1 F dF
2( d2 2dF)
n1 = 1
dF d F
n2 n1 n n1
from 2
v u R
hi
3 3/2 1 16. v /5 ...(1)
–0= h0
2v R
V = 3R hi '
...(2)
Now for similar triangle ABE & CDE v5 5
d a 2 h0 '
a = d
3R 2R 3 ...(3)
y5 y
y is focal length
hi h
0 ...(4)
yv y
1 1 1
...(5)
v 5 y
Solve (1), (4) & (5)
17. 12 cm 19. 0°
The focal length of mirror formed will be
f m = R/2 30º
i=60º
f = 20 cm i e
•
10 cm = 30º = i + e – A
R = 22 cm 60 + e – 30 = 30
fm = –11cm e=0
[–ve sign as concave mirror is formed]
f = 20cm
20. Here, f0 = 75 cm ; fe = 5 cm
1 1 1
2 We know, D = 25 cm
feq fm f
fo fe 75 1 5
Now, M = – f 1 D =– 25
1 2 10 11 e 5
= – =
11 20 110 = – 15 × 1.2 = – 18
110
feq =
21 21. Here, f = 12cm
The maximum magnification occurs, when the
image is formed by the lens at the least
18. 10 cm distance of distinct vision i.e. at D = 25 cm.
From the formula Therefore, maximum magnification given by
h0 h1 h2 8 12.5 10 cm the lens,
D 25
M=1+ =1+ = 1 + 2.1 = 3.1
f 12
www.motion.ac.in
36 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
1. B 4. B
The situation is shown in figure For total internal reflection
1 from glass-air interface, criti-
sin C cal angle C must be less than A C
R
A angle of incidence
AB B
tan C i.e., C < i
OA
12 cm
AB OA tan C O or C < 450 ( i 450 )
B
OA 1 1 1
or AB But n = sin C C sin n
1 2
12 36 1
or sin1 450
4
2
7 n
1
3 1 0 1
or n sin 45 or n
sin 450
2. A
1
or n or n 2
y (1 / 2 )
We know 1.22
D d
5. A
yd D = (-1)A
D
1.22
For blue light is greater than that for red light.
So, D2 > D1
103 x 3 x 10 3
D 5m D
1.22 x 5 x 107 max 5m
6. B
Power of a lens is reciprocal of its focal length.
3. A
power of combined lens is
1 1 1 P = P1+P2
( 1) ...(i)
fa R1 R 2 = -15 + 5 = -10D
1 100
f 10 cm
1 1 P 10
(1.5 1)
R1 R 2 7. C
1 1 1
1 g m 1 1 = constant, so (c) is the correct
v u f
and fm m R1 R 2 graph.
8. A
1 1.5 1 1
1 It is passible when
fm 1.6 1R R 2
obj ec t ke pt at
v
or fm 8 x fa ce nt re of
curvature.
(v)
1 1 1 u=v
8x fa m = 1.6 m u u(u>f)
5 P 5 u = 2f, v = 2f.
Pm = / fm= 1 D
9. D 14. C
3 Scattering for blue light is largest and it is
sin C ...(i) polarized by scattering.
2
Also for polarized light
C I = Io cos2
15. A
1 Note: As refractive index for z > 0 and z 0
sinr sin(900 C) cos C
2 is different X-Y plane should be boundary be-
sin 2 2 1 tween two media. Angle of incidence
; sin x
sinr 1 3 2
AZ 1
1
1
cos i =
sin 2
A A A 2 2
2
x y z
3
i = 600
10. B
sin i 3
As intensity is maximum at axis, From Snell's law
sin r 2
will be maximum and speed will be minimum
r 450
on the axis of the beam.
beam will converge. 16. A
1 1 1
11. A
u v f
12. C 1 du 1 dv
2 0
u dt v2 dt
1
Apparent shift h = 1 h dv v2 du
2
dt u dt
Apparent shift produced by water,
v f
1 But
h1 1 h1 t uf
1 2
dv f du
and apparent shift produced by kerosene,
dt u f dt
1 0.2
2
h2 1 h2 1
2 x 15 ms1
2 .8 0.2 15
1 1
h h1 h2 1 h1 1 h2 17. D
1 2
1 1 1
1 1 1
( 1) S 1 t 1 1cm cm
f R R 1.5 3
1 2
For focal length of the lens,
Also, by Cauchy's formula
1 1 1 1 1
B B
A .... f v u 12 240
2 4
1 20 1 240
As blue red or f cm.
f 240 21
blue red Now, to get back image on the film, lens has
Hence, fblue fred 1 35
to form image at 12 3 cm = cm such
3
that the glass plate will shift the image on
the film.
www.motion.ac.in
38 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
1 1 1 1 1 1 3 21
As ,
f v u u v f 35 240 1 1 sin
sin A sin <
48 3 7 21 1 m
1680 560
u 5.6 m
1 1
sin–1 sin A sin m <
18. C
19. D
23. B
Since 4/3 < 3/2 thus f1 > f
By theory
since 5/3 > 3/2 thus f2 changes sign
20. D 24. D
Green
1
f > fgreen
< green
35° 79°
> green T.I.R
21. B
Bends upwards A m
sin
2
&
A
sin
2
22. C
A
r2 < c
r2 < sin–1 (1/)
sin r2 < 1/ r1 r2
sin = sin r1
r1 = sin–1 (sin/)
sin (A – r1) < 1/
1 sin 1
sin A sin <
sin 1
A – sin–1 < sin–1
1 sin
A – sin–1 < sin–1
1. C 4. B
1 1 1 f1 ve (a) for r1 30º
f1 f2 30 f2 ve
1. sin i 3 sin 30º = i = 60º
f2 3
f1 2
1 2 1 1 1
Now
f1 3f1 30 3f 30 f1 10 cm
1
= f2 15 cm
(b) act as a slab
2. C
zero deviation
Ist Refraction n2 1; n1 4 3 d 33.25
5. C
3 1 1 2
d' 33.25 24.94 cos x 1 2
4
feq fm f = 15
15
feq , u = – 20 cm
15 cm
2
1 1 2
v 12 cm
v 20 15
33.25 cm
25 cm
r
6. C
(C) 20
1 1 1
f = 5 cm
4 10 10 f
2nd Refraction L v1 15 n2 ; n1 1 = Error u = 0.1 cm, v = 0.1 cm
3
d 25 cm f u v
f 0.05 cm
25 4 f2 u2 v2
75 4v1 60 v1 135
v1 15 3 4 7. B
135
v1 , f = 18.3 cm 20 cm
4
3. B
2 1
C for interface I & II sin c c = 45º
2 2 rf
3 8. (A) - P ; (B) - R; (C) - R; (D) - P, Q, S
C for interface II & III sin c c = 60º
2 9. C
10. C
2 I
11. B
12. A
2 II
A
r1 r2 30º
2
13. B
3 III Just misses means we are talking about critical
angle in medium 3. So angle of refraction in medium
minimum angle = 60º 4 is 90º.
n 1
n0 sin 0 sin 90 θ sin 1
8
8
14. (A) P,Q,R,S ; (B) Q ; (C) P, Q, R, S ;
(D) P, Q, R, S
www.motion.ac.in
40 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
(iii) (66,38) – 1 1 1 30 cm
66 38 24.1
v f u f=15cm
1 1 –1 1
– (Incorrect) 1 1 1
65.8 37.8 24.008 24 v = 6 cm
v 10 15
1 1 1 6 cm distance from lens. so from mirror its 16 cm
(iv) (78, 39) – – =– (Incorrect)
78 39 26 image will be real.
17. A,B,C
1.sin 60° = 3 sin r
Air B
r = 30° ,
8cm
60°
37
= 150° 60°
c 20.
r + + + 135° = 360° 185°
1 1 1 1 3
– = –
u f v 10 25
u1 = – 50 cm 29. B
By definition
50
for v = n = C/V
7 so V = C/n.
1 1 1
u 10 50 = u2 = – 25 m R=20 m
30. C
2
n1sin1 = n2 sin2
25 18 sin1 = –x sin2 (x is R.I)
speed of object = 2 must be negative.
30 5
speed of object = 3 km/hr. so (C)
31. C
22. from laws of Refraction h
24m
n1 sin i = n2 sin r O 8m h/3
Denser to Rarer Away from normal from wavelength ratio
Rarer to Denser Towards the normal. = 1.5 (from 1/2)
23. B 1 1 1
+ = (1.5 – 1)
As intensity is maximum at axis, 8 24 R
will be maximum and speed will R = 3m Ans.
be minimum on the axis of the beam.
beam will converge. 32. A
24. D
3
i r
For a parallel cylinderical beam, wavefront
2 1
1
will be planar. 2
2 - 3
2
25. A
Mirror in x–z plane
26. After Critical angle all the rays are Reflected Since y component is reversed
and so No transmition occurs. (1/2) 1
tan= =
( 3/2) 3
1 1 1 1 1 1 =30°
27.
v 24 8 v 8 24
v = 12 cm 33. D
4 (P) e f : No TIR and ray at surface 1
d = 12 × = 16
3 and 2 going to us normal and at surface of
d = 18 – 16 = 2 cm 2 and 3 going away from normal. So,
2 > 1
28. B (Q) e g : No bending So 1 = 2
Left lens (R) e h : No TIR at surface 1 and 2
1 1 1 1 away from normal and again at surface 2
(1.5 1) – and 3 bending away from noraml hence 2 >
f1 14 28
Right lens 3. No TIR hence 2 2 > 1.
1 1 1 1
(1.2 1) 2
f2 14 70 (S) e i : TIR hence sin 45º >
1
1 1 1 1 1 1
feq f1 f2 28 70 20 1
2 <
feq = 20 cm 2
1 1 1
1 > 2 2.
v u f
1 1 1
v = 40 cm
v 40 20
www.motion.ac.in
42 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
1 1 1 1 1 r 1 0.5
feq
f1 r feq r r 2 f2 = R
1 3 1 f2 = 2R
1
f1 2 r
1 1 37. 0007
f1 2r
1 1 1 1 1
feq f1 f2 feq r
15cm Image for mirror
feq = r
1 1 1 1 1 1
+ =– = –
v (15) 10 v 15 10
23 1
= =–
30 30
1 1
v (30)
f1 2r v = – 30 cm & m1 = – =– =–2
u (15)
1 3 1 1 Image from lens
1
f2 2 r
1 1 1
feq 2r 2r
feq = -r 20cm
1 3 1 1 1 1 1
1 – =
f1 = 2 r r v u f
1 1 1 1
= + =
r v 20 10
1 3 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 =
f2 = 2 r
=
2r v 10 20
v = – 20 cm
1 1 1 m2 = – 1
feq = 2r
feq r 2r |M1| = |m1 × m2| = 2
P-2 Q-4 R-3 S-1 In air for lens
39. 2
1 1 2
= 2 R R = 10 cm i 60
f 1 × sin 60° = n × sin r1
When dipped
3
r1 sin1
1 3 6 2 2 2 4 2 2m
= 2 7 1 10 = × = = By snell’s law
f' 7 10 70 35
3
1 2 1 87 1 sin n sin 60 sin1
= – = m2 = 7 |M2| = 14 2n
v' 35 10 140
|M2|/|M1| = 7 3 4n2 3 1 3
sin
2 2 2 2
38. B Differentiating w.r.t. n :
S1 S2
3 8n
cos d · dn
x 2 2 4n2 3 2
50cm
60, n 3
1 d 3 8 3
2 1 2 1 dn
2 dn 2 2
v u R 2 4 3 3 2
1 1.5 1 1.5 d
2
v 50 10 dn
1 15 5 40. A,C
v 500 100
1 1 3
v 20 100
53
100
1 2
v 100
100
v 50
2
now for S2
2 1 2 1
n
v u R For TIR = C sin1 2
u=–x n1
v r = 90° –
1.5 1 1.5 1 n (sin i) = n1 sin r = n1 cos
– =
x 10 n sin im n1 cos c
x = +20
d = 50 + 20 = 70 cm
n22
n1 1 n12 n22
n12
1 2
NA = sin im = n1 n22
n
Now put values.
41. D
Which is lesser
www.motion.ac.in
44 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
d2 d2
O = 30 cm 2tR = R=
4 8t
36 cm2 120
1 1 1 R= = = 15 cm
8 0.3 cm 8
fm = 10 – 30
fm = 15 cm R = 30 cm 1 1
= ( – 1) R
For lens f
convex mirror
1 1 1
= =
f 15 30
O 10 cm f = 30
v
m = –2 = v = 24 = 60 cm
u
1 1 1 1 1 1
– =+ f f = + f2 = 20
v u 2 2 60 30
cm
1 1
= (n – 1)
f2 R
1 1
= (n – 1)
20 30
3
n= +1
2
n = 2.5
1. A 7. C
In monochromatic light, only one wave length Given I1 = I & I2 = 4I
is present.
Imax . I1 I2
2
= 9I
2. C 2
4. B 9. C
2 D
x ;
d
2 1 106
7.692 10. A
5460 1010 10
5. B
Given y1 = A1 sin wt, f1 = 0
Wave front.
y2 = A2 cos (wt + f) = A2 sin t
2
f2 = +f
2
11. B
D f = f2 – f1
y 62 1D
62 y
x 1D d
2 2 d
Dx = × Df x 2D 62 1D 62 5893
2 4 67
d d 5461
12. C
Dx = 2
2 dy
x 2n 1
2 D
6. D
D
In interferene there should be two coherent y 2n 1
2d
sources and propagation of waves should be
simultaneously and in same direction.
www.motion.ac.in
46 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
13. A 18. B
d.y
D xd (2 1) t ( 1).2t
x D D
d L
d.y tD
14. A t= y
D d
13
= 0.13
2 19. A
2 d.y 2
= m =
D
S 100
D 1
14 y=
d 4
v13 /2
f=
= I’ = 4I cos2 = 2I
2 2
3 108 100
f= = 1.5 × 1010 Hz 20. B
2
15. C
d
8d
I’ = 4I cos2 d
2
1 1
cos2 = cos = d = ( – 1) A × 1
2 4 2 2
2x dy 8d2.2
.dy 1 no. of fringes =
cos D
D D 2
= 5.33
16. D
4 × 6300 = (4.5)
21. B
4 6300 16 – 4 = 12 cm
= 2 = 5600 Å
9
22. B
17. D
23. C
S1
S
c.m. shift
S2 down
D
= = remain same.
d
t changes more rapidly when we go outwards.
path diff. changes more rapidly
fringe width
31. C
24. A
If unpolarised light is passed through a polariod
P1, its intensity will become half.
25. C
1
2 So I1 = I with vibrations parallel to the
= + (2t). 2 0
at top phase difference axis of P1.
t 0 Now this light will pass through second
= polaroid P2 whose axis is inclined at an angle
o phase difference
Minima for all the of 30º to the axis of P1 and hence, vibrations
wave length. of I1. So in accordance with Malus law, the
Top position will intensity of light emerging from P2 will be
appear dark. 2
As we move down violet Maxima will appear 1 3 3
I2 = I1 cos2 30º = 0
2 2 = 8 I0
first. first colour will be violet.
26. A 2 3
By Theory = = 37.5 %
0 8
27. D
32. D
By Theory
33. B
28. B
34. C
29. A
Statement-I is true, Statement-II is true and
Statement-II is correct expl anation of
Statement-I.
30. A
= .....(A)
a
x
= .....(B)
f
From eqs. (A) and (B) Brewster angle is defined when reflected and
refracted rays are at 90°
x f
= ,x= .....(C)
a f a
According to question x = ?, f = 40 cm
= 5896 × 10–8 cm
a = 0.5 × 10–1 cm .....(D)
From eqs. (C) and (D)
40 5896 10 8
x= 96 = 0.047 cm
5 10 2
www.motion.ac.in
48 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
1. B 11. B
Wave nature
d
2 1 7
2. B
Principle of Superposition.
12. B
3. B n R D D
Given I1 : I2 = 100 : 1 (n 1) B
d d
I1 n. 7800 = (n + 1) 5200
= 10 : 1 n = 2.
I2
2 13. C
Imax = I1 I2 = (10 + 1)2 = 121
C the fringe next to the central will be
2 red.
Imin = I1 I2 = (10 – 1)2 = 81
14. D
Imax
= 121 : 81
Imin x = (2n + 1)
2
4. D x = (1 + 3) – (2 + 4) = (2n + 1)
2
In coherent sources initial phase remains
constant.
15. C
4I0 = I
5. B
I0 = I/4
y1 = A1 sin3t, f1 = 0
16. C
y2 = A2 cos 3t
6 dy 2
D
y2 = A2 sin 3t , f2 =
2 6 2 6 2I = 4I cos2 cos
2 2
D f = f2 – f1
1
3 4 2 =
2
2 6 6 6 3
d.y 2
.
6. B 2 4 D 2
3
1 10 y 1
7. B y = 1.25 ×10–4 m
1 500 10 1 4
8. B
17. A
x n maxima
d.d
n
6D
9. B
d2
D = [n = 1, 2, 3.....]
6nD
d
18. D
10. D
D = By using white light instead of single D
=
wavelength light. d
In water so
19. C 25. C
By Theory
2I = 4I cos2
2
26. B
1
cos = t 1.7 1 D t 1.4 1 D D
2 2 Shift S 5
d d d
= 3
2 4 t 8 10 mm 8 m
3
1 t 27. A
2 2
2 4
t = /2
20. C
As the D position of first maxima t 1.33
D 1.5
i.e., y d
First decrease then increase. 4
2× t 600
3
21. C t = 225 nm.
I0 = 4I
Intensity due to one
28. D
d.y 2
=
D 29. A
2 5
0.25 10 4 10 2
= 30. B
100 102 6000 10 10
= /3 31. C
3 3I0 32. D
I’ = I0 cos 2
2 = 4 D/d
22. C 33. A
0.3 ×10–3 × sin30º = n × 500 × 10–9 By Defination
n = 300
299 + 299 + 1 = 599 34. A
23. D 35. A
2A( 1)
x
36. A
D
2 23
3 5890
20
x 5
tan = 28
D 2 & 2
30
24. D
By Theory
www.motion.ac.in
50 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
1. BD 2 a ir
For coherent source x = 2 2 + x1 – x2
frequency same
constant phase difference x = 2 air + x1 – x2
3 > 2 > 1
air
2. BCD x1 = x2 =
2
The fringes next to central will be violet x = 2air = nair
and there will not be a complete dark Maxima at Interface (1)
fringe.
1 < 2 > 3
x1 = , x2 = 0
3. AD 2
air
(1) x = 2air + (2n 1)
2 2
Minima at (1) interface
2 =
(2)
=t
1. 81:1 9. x = n
(1.7 –1).t –(1.4 –1)t = 5
2. Bright A, C and Dark B, D
5 4800 1010
A Maxima t
0.3
= 8 × 10–6 m
Minima
D B
D 3
10. 3I 4I cos2 , cos
C 2 2 2
A, C Bright 5 7
B, D Dark , ,
2 6 6 6
3. 60 dy 2 5 7
, ,
[ . R >>2a] D 3 3 6
:
D D 5 D 7
y . , , .
d 6 d
6 d 6
a 2a min.Dis tan ce
7 D 5 D D
Minimum Distance = =
3a = n n = 15 6 d 6 d 36
x = 15 Maxima 1. 600 109
14 + 14 + 14 + 14 + 4 = 60 = 2 104 m
3 103
4. 2t = n 11. x = dsin =
x
2 n ....(1) y
2500 d d2y2 = 2(D2 + y2)
D y2
2
x'
2 (n 1) ....(2)
2500 103 1
y (d –l )= D = y =2 2 2 2 2 0.35m
(2) – (1) (32 1)106
2
x ' x
2500 x’ – x = 0.85 mm 12. Loyd’s mirror
fringwidth
D 600 109 1
120 {d=2mm} = 0.15 mm
no. of fringes = 141 2d 2 2 1 103
x'x
5. I
I = R2 = a12 + a22 + 2a1 a2 cos
Relative Trensity)
= I + 4I + 4I cos
I = 5I – 4I = I
13.
6. D
2 o 0.75 1 2 3
Imax . A max .
=9
Imin . A min.
x =d sin = d. =
2
9 D 3D
x 14. 7.5 103
8. 12 = 600 D 2d
1
d
15D
x 7.5 103 5000Å
18 2 400 D 2d
2 d
www.motion.ac.in
52 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
1 1 1 20. 10-7 m
V 15 10
I1 A 21. d/6
0.5mm
d/2
2d
0.25mm –30cm d 3 x white spot
O O
S
0.25mm
15cm d 2d
0.5mm x= = d/6
2 3
I2
130cm
6900 1.33
equation is =
6 2 1
2. 1:1 6300
2
1.33
I f2 A2 63 1.33
= 0.63mm
I1
2
f1 A1
2 2 2 1.33 1 103
f 2a
= =
I2 f2 A2 2f a 1.58
(b) 1.33 1 t 2
1 4
= =1:1 6300 1.33 100
4 1 =1.575m
1.33 2 0.20
4 8. x = (–1)t
3. cos 1
d = (1.17–1)(1.5 ×10–7) = 0.255 × 10–7
P
Here path difference at Now for central maxima :
a point P on the circle dy 3 107
is given by x 0.255 × 10–7 = y
S1 d S2 D D
x = d cos ....(i) y = 0.085D
For maxima at P
x = n 9. When convex lens is introduced,
From equation (i) and (ii) v = 70 cm, u = – 30 cm
n 4 v h 7 0.7cm
n = d cos = cos–1 = cos–1 i
d d u h0
3 h0
h0 = 0.3 cm i.e. d = 0.3 cm
2 x
4. D
0.0195 cm
d
2 2 x
= / .x = (100cm)
.0195cm = 5850 Å
0.3cm
D 10. /4
5. 1 ...(1)
103
www.motion.ac.in
54 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
1. A 9. B
I0
Intersity of polorized light = I1 = 4I0 cos2
2 2
I0 I0 x=0 I1 = 4I0
Untransmitted light = I – =
2 2 2x x
x = = × =
y y 2
2. C
x I1 2
2
sin ay I2 = 4I0 cos2 = 2I0 =
I Io and 4 I2 1
D
For principal maximum y=0 10. D
=0 A1 = 2A2 Þ I1 = 4I2 = 4I0
Hence, intensity will remain same. 2 2
Imax = I1 I2 = I1 4I2 = 9I2
3. D = 9I0
By Theory
I = I1 + I2 I1 I2 cos
4. D
= I2 + 4I2 + 2 I2 4I2 cosf
2 6
= × = = 5I2 + 4I2 cos
3
Im
= (5 + 4 cos)
I = I0 cos2
= I0 cos2 9
2 6
Im
I 3 = [1 + 4 (cos)]
= 9
I0 4
Im 2
= 1 8 cos
5. C 9 2
31D 42D
= Þ 3l1 = 4l1 11. A
d d
Through A only component parallel to slit will
3 3 pass so intensity
2 = = × 590 A B 45º
4 1 4 after passing through A
= 442.5 nm I0
will be .
2
6. D
After passing through B
Initiancity of parallel beam is cylindrical
therefore the wave front will be planar. I0 I
I= cos2 = 0
2 4
7. B
Both statements I and II are correct but 12. B
statement II does not explain statement I. Path differnce on the circle of radius R around
O on the wall will be same hence concentric
8. B circle.
Constant + source
I1 = 4I0 cos2 = 4I0 B
2
R
For incomepent source
I2 = I0 + I0 = 2I0 S2 O
S1 d
I1
I2
=2
13. B
394-Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota
Wave Optics - 55
d2 d2
2tR = R=
4 8t
36 cm2 120
R= = = 15 cm
8 0.3 cm 8
www.motion.ac.in
56 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
1. B 3. B
r = f tan
1 1
cos 2
= cos =± or rf
2 4 2 2
r2 f2
4. A
b
d
a
c
2 4 5 f
= , , ,
2 3 3 3 3 e h
2.x 2 4 8 10 g
= = , , ,
3 3 3 3
Wavefronts are parallel in both media.
2 2 4 8 10 Therefore, light which is perpendicular to the
d sin . = , , ,
3 3 3 3 wvefront travels as a parallel beam in each
medium.
= sin–1 3d
5. C
All points on a wavefront are at the same
2. 60°
phase.
Let be the angle of incidence at face AB,
then for total internal reflection at face AB d = c and f = e
d – f = c – e
Hence, the correxct option is (C)
6. B
In medium 2, wavefront bends away from
the normawl after refraction. Therefore, ray
of light which is perpendicular to wavefront
bends toward the normal in medium 2 during
refraction. So, medium 2 is denser or its speed
1 2 in medium 1 is more.
sin C1
2 2
7. A,B
1
sin or sin sin 45 I1 = 4I I2 = I Imax = 9I
2
Imin = I
> 45° (A) If d = only central one maxima
For total internal reflection at face CD. (B) < d < 2 one central and one more
3 3 (C) I, I
sin sin C1 Imax = 9I
2 2
Imin = 0
or sin > sin60° or > 60° (D) 4I, 4I
Therefore, for total internal reflection at both
Imax = 16 I
the surfaces.
Imin = 0
min = 60°.
12. D
2dsin =
15. B,D
(b) Fringes will be semi–circular.
d=
2 sin d 0.6003 103
Now,
cos ec cos d 600 109
dd =
2 d 1
103
dd d. cot d ( d constant) 2
dd So, the region very close to O is dark.
(d) Semi circular bright and dark fringes
d
will be formed.
dd =
dd
fraction
d
dd = absolute error
www.motion.ac.in
58 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
2. A
Charge is independent of speed
L L
3. D
Electrostatics is the study of charge at rest.
Q Q
r = 8.94 × 10–2 m
If l >>>> x
2kqQ 8. B
Fnet = x
l3 Charge Q divided in two parts q & Q – q
Condition for oscillation.
Force between q & Q - q
5. D Kq(Q q)
q1 q2 F
r2
r For maximum force dF/dq = 0
Then
Kq1q2 dF K
F .........(1) [q(1) (Q q)1] 0
r2 dq r 2
q1 q2
q Q q 0
r/2
Kq1q2 Q 2q
F1 .........(2)
(r / 2)2
Q 2
From equation (1) & (2)
F1 = 4F q 1
9. B 13. C
q Individual electric field at q place at origin
B
due to point A, B, C
a a
Kq(iˆ 2j ˆ
ˆ 3k)
EA 3
600 q Kq2 ( 14)
C F
q a A a2 ˆ)
600 K q(ˆi ˆj k
EB 3
Kq2 ( 13)
F
a2
The net force on any charge say at point A.
EA
Fnet F 2 F 2 2F 2 cos 600 A )
,3
Kq2 ( 1,2
3F 3 q EB
a2
(0,0,0)
10. D (2,
C
2,2
Direction of arrow shows magnitude of force ) EC
and Net resultant force shows by R which is
perpendicular to the side AB. Kq(2 î 2 ĵ 2k̂)
OR Ec
( 12 )3
Resultant R is to surface AB
B C I. Now E A .EB = 0 E A EB
+q –q
FOD
FOC II. E B 4 E C
R
9 109 50 10–6
Now E E = 4500 v/m
100
www.motion.ac.in
60 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
16. C 20. D
Our aim is to found electric field at point P The net force on the sphere is
dQ
x2
R2
F (mg)2 (qE2 )
dE
R
P The effective gravity is
x
F
dE g' g2 (qE / m)2
m
Ep 2dE cos
2kdQ x L L
Ep T 2 g' 2
x
2
R 2 x2 R 2 g (qE / m)2
2
2kx KQ.x
Ep 2 dQ ; Ep 2
x R 2 3 /2
(R x2 )3 / 2 21. C
For x >>R Higher Lower
KQx KQ potential (v1) potential (v2)
2 3/2 2
(x ) x
Ep x 2
U1 qV1 qE –q U2 = – qV2
17. A
Electric field is cancel out for diametrially U1 < U2
opposite element, only removed diametrially
opposite element gives field.
E
kdq d 22. B
So E 2 m v m
R
Q 1 Q Q
E k d 2 Initially
2R R u m u m
1 Q finally
Q at closest
E 3 d
R distance
dq
from Energy conservation
1 kq2
18. D
2
mv2 2 1 / 2 mu2
d
...(1)
from Momentum conservation
mv = 2mu u = v/2 ...(2)
19. A from (1) and (2)
1 mv2 kq2
mv2
2 4 d
4kq2 1 4q2
d =
mv 2 4 0 mv2
–
23. D
-q -q
r Q r
2kˆi
4k 2k 2k Net potential energy of the given system
R R R
E
R KqQ Kq2 KQqo
Electric field along vertical direction cencle U
r 2r r
each other, net field along horizontal direction. Given that U = 0
2KqQ Kq2
Enet 2 R î
0 r 2r
Q 1
q 4
24. B 29. B
y Given Q = 2 C, F = 100 N
We know that E = F/Q
q
q 100
a 2 E 50N / C
2
q
x x 30. A
z C B
q q q
q
EA
ED
Kq2 Kq2 Kq2 Kq2
U 2 2 2 2 EB EC
r r r r
a2 q q
r2 x2 D A
2 EA = EB = EC = ED
4kq2 Resolving horizontal & vertical component
U (Ex = 0, Ey = 0)
x2 a2 / 2 Then
ENet = 0
25. A
q1 u q2
y
X 31. B
m m Given me = 9.1 × 10–31 kg, e = 1.6 × 10–19 C
After long time y will move with velocity u The intensity of field required to balance the
and v x = 0 becouse weight of electron, so
momentum is conserved qE = mg
-2q a -2q
O
k q q
Ui = [(–2q)(–2q)+q(–2q)+q(–2q)] = 0
a From figure net electric field at center = 0
k 3 3 kq
Uf = [(–2q)(–2q)+q(–2q)+q(–2q)] = 0 and net potential at center = volt
2a a
W = Uf – Ui = 0 E=0&V0
28. A 34. B
Potential energy at height h
= – (Work done by gravity + work done by
electric field)
= – (-mg – qE) h = (mg + qE) h
The graph is a straight line passing though
origin.
www.motion.ac.in
62 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
35. B 40. C
A
V1 – V2 = V2 – V3
1 1 1 1
kq kq
3
m
r
1 r2 r2 r3
2
B 1 1 C r2 r1 r3 r2 t1 t2
m O m
2 2 r1r2 r2r3 r1 r3
Net potential at O since, r1 < r3, we get t1< t2
VO = VA + VB + VC
41. D
k(6 106 ) k(2 106 ) k(3 106 ) From the figure, we can see that the distance
VO between two equipotential surfaces is
3 /2 1/2 1/2
d = 10 sin 30° = 5 cm
VO = 1.52 105 V
V 40 20
E 400N / C
d 5 102
36. D
100 42. A
y=3+x E = 2 î ĵ
43. C
100
dv = –
2
î ĵ . dxî dyĵ
EB B
2kp
1 3 –q +q A
100 EA
r2
=– dx dy
2 3 1 EA = – 2 EB
v = 0
44. C
37. D +q qE
line of force
E
qE -q
39. C 46. B
Integrate partially one of the term We know that
KP
v= 4a xy z dx const.
Eaxis
2KP
; E
r3 r3
x2
4ay z = const. Eaxis 2
2
E 1
const .
z=
x 4y2
47. A 51. B
Potential energy U = qdV
2q. 2 a q. 2 a dV
= q dr
dr
dv
q. 2 a = q dr
dr
After resolving hori zontal and vertical dV V 2kp 2 cos
= p1 ×
component dr r2
x - axis component will cancel out dV – 2p1kp 2 cos
Net dipole moment along y direction = 2qa ĵ = P1
dr
=
r3
48. A
49. A
We know that electric field at a point
1 P cos Pr cos
V = V= =
4 0 r2 4 0 r 2
Kp.r
V 3
r
50. A
qE
2
2m
m
1
qE
net = qE 2sin +qE sin
= 3qE sin
net = 3qE
I = 3qE
3qE
= ...(1)
I
For angular SHM = - 2 ...(2)
From (1) and (2)
3qE
=
I
3 1 10-6 20 10 3
=
6
K shm 3 1 10 – 6 20 10 – 3
=
I 6
1
= = 0.1 rad /sec
100
www.motion.ac.in
64 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
Exercise - II
Level - I
1. B 3. A
E1 E1 E2
Emax E2
4Q –Q
E (E 1) (E 2) P.E1
E2
x1 R/ 2 x2
2. B dF 6. B
dF = dqE q
2k F
dF = Rd a
R –Q
2k d
dF Q a
R q
dF x
Net force on –Q charge = 2F cos
2F cos
a=
m a
Due to symmetry 2kqQx
a
m(a2 x2 )
2kQ
Fnet = dF sin =
sin d da x
0 R 0 for amax , 0
dx
Q
F= a
2
0R which gives x
2
at x a=0
x0 a=0
qE 1 10 6 300
7. B Max. acc = = 0.3 m/sec2
At equilibrium 103
f = mgsin qE
Net is also 0 f m
2qE sin R= f.R. Max. deacc. = –0.3 m/sec2
2 qE sin = mgR sin So Vmax = 4+ 0.3 10
qE
mg = 7 m/sec.
E= V min = 4 – 0.3 10
2q
= 1 m/sec.
1V7
8. A
12. D
r1 = (4m,7m,2m) r2 = (1m,3m,2m) To calculate the electric field on z-axis, we
-8 r shall first consider two charges placed at the
q=10
opposite corners of the square.
r r2 r1 3î 4 ĵ
r 5
kq 90 z
V= = ....(1)
r2 r 5
kqr q q
90
E = r 3 = 25 ....(2) L/ 2 L/ 2
The electric field due to these two charges
Deviding (1) & (2)
is
r =5
kq 2kqz
V = 18 Volt cos 2
2
Z L /2 2 (z L2 / 2)3 / 2
2
(2a,0)
KqQ
think !! x = 2a F
(a +x )
2 2
13. C
-q
x is not small (0,-a)
y
So F= -k x not
s at i s fi ed so E2 E1
excecute oscillatory
but not SHM.
P
x
11. A
u
qE
a=
m
www.motion.ac.in
66 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
1 6qv
v mv2 3qV v
q 2 m
h2 q
22. B
Fe acom. = g
Movement is parallel to x-axis
h1
w.d. by 2 is zero.
/2
/2
= R 2
cos d = R
2
+v sin 0
0
–v 2q 2 2qR
= R 2 .1 = .R
R
/2
dPsin =
2qR
27. C dP2 =
0
Y 2V
E 4V 2 2qR
P=
d
X
2
www.motion.ac.in
68 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
31. B dx
(W.D)E + (W.D.)mg = K
.dx
2 0 1
x qE(sin) + (–cos)mg mv 2
2
mg 1 1
q mg 1 - mv
2
q 2 2 2
v 2g
2 v 2g ,
d = R
2 0 . xdx
l
l2Sin 35. B
= x .dx
0 sin 0 = u
20
v
R
32. C
R 2R
qp from AMC about point 0
(R 3 ,0,0) mvd = mvR
vd
u= ...(1)
R
q K2R kq1q2
Energy at Point P = 4 + q 1 2 1 2
0 2R from E.C. mv mu
2 2 R
q q q 1 1 v 2 d2 Kq1q2
= 4 4 = 2
2
mv m 2
0 0 0 2 2 R R
qk(2R ) q 1 d2
Kq1q2
Energy at point 0 = = 2 mv 2 1 2
..(2)
R 0 2 R R
i.e. particle will reach just point 0.
from eq. (1) and (2)
33. A 1
9 10 9 10-12
1 0.25 9
1 v 2 1
Q
2 1 10 3
P –q 2
v2 m/sec.
3
R x
kQx
F -qE -q 2
(R x2 )3 / 2 36. D
E
kqQx kqQx T
If x << R then F = 3 ma
R R 3
kqQx
a = ; a = -2 x q,m q,E F=qE/m
mR3
qQ mg
=
4 0 mR 3 2
1/2
qE
geff g2
34. B m
T 2
geff
E = mg/q
T
T= 2
2
qE
mg
g2
m
Exercise - II
Level - II
1. C,D 2(9–x) =x
By properties of charges 18–2x =x
x = 6 cm
2. A,B,C
Q –Q/4 5. A,B,D
x r P Dimension theory
A B
KQ KQ / 4
Vp = – =0 6. A,C
xr r
1 1 Fnet
– =0 4r –x – r = 0
x r 4r
x
r=
3 u
KQ In constant force field path may be straight
KQ / 4
vp = + line
r x r = 0 Fnet
1 1 x u or Parabola
+ =0 r=
4r x r 5
Q –Q/4 7. B,C,D
P
r To reduce potential energy
KQ K Q / 4 dU
Ep = 2 – =0 ;r> 0 F=–
x r r2 dx
F=0
4Q Q x 16Q
3. C,D
If we slightly displaced –Q charge towards B
thus force on –Q due to B increses 9cm
2
A Q 16Q K 2 4Q K
B = 2
+2q
a a +2q x 2
9 x
2(9–x) =x
–Q move s toward s BC (uns tabl e 18–2x =x
equillibrium)
x = 6 cm
If we displaced to wards y axis
8. A,D
Fnet
higher density Higher electric field
(stable equilibrium)
EA> EB
Electric field lines from higher potential to
4. B,C lower potential.
To reduce potential energy VB>VA
dU 9. A,C
F=–
dx Given VA = 3V, VB = 4V, q = -e
F=0
4Q Q x 16Q 3V 7V
A B
9cm F = eE
2 4Q K 2 k.E. = e (7–3) = 4ev
16Q K
= 2
x2 9 x
www.motion.ac.in
70 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
E
10
60(V)× (m) = 6Vm
E 100
Q E Q For the second equipotential
E
20
Q 30(V)× (m) = 6 Vm
100
4KQ For the third equipotential
vc=
r 60
At Z axis horizontal component of E cancelled 10(V)× (m) = 6 Vm
100
but vertical is added.
We can understand that the product of
potential (V)
11. A,C
and radial distances (r) of equipotential lines
[as in figure] is equal to 6 Vm-1. hence, general
relation of potential (V) and radial distance
(r) can be written as
A C 6
B V Vm1
r
Since E = –(V)/(r) r̂ , substituting V = 6/r,,
It is clear from figure at point A and C Net we have
electric field is zero. And point B Net electric 6
field towards slide. E ˆ r Vm-1
r r
6
12. B,C,D or r Vm-1
E 2ˆ
Electric field is from high to low potential. r
i.e., along –ve x-axis.
b. Since E is directed in r̂ –direction and obeys
(a) is incorrect. inverse square law, E must be outward [as
The force on electron is towards right. Work shown in figure]
done by electric field in moving electron from The above E-field must be caused by a
B to C is positive. positive point charge.
(b) is correct.
VD – VC = VE – VD WCD=WDE 15. A,B,C
(c) is correct.
From E to A, the electron moves against the 16. B,C
electric force. So potential energy increases. F net = 2F sin
(d) is correct.
kqQ d
2. 2
13. A,C,D (r d ) (r d2 )1 / 2
2 2
www.motion.ac.in
72 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
9 109 40 1012
Initially, the forces actng on each ball are 9N
tension T, weight mg, and electric force F. 0.04
For the equilibrium of the spheres,
T cos = mg 8. 0
T sin = F E1 = 2Ecos
KQ
F E1 2
or tan = (i) x 2 a2
mg
When the balls are suspended in a liquid of a
density and dielectric cnstant K, the electric cos
a2 x 2
F
force will become , while weight E
k
mg' = mg – V g (T h = V g) E1
E
or mg' = mg 1 (ii)
x
As = ', according to the question, equating
(i) and (ii), we get –Q a +Q
F F
mg
Kmg 1 120
o
o
120
1.6 120
o
K 2
1.6 0.8
or K = 2 Enet = 0.
3/ 2
3 Y
9. – 3 × 10–9C
11
E
Kq r
E 3
r
Electric field at (3,1,1)
K 10 9 3i j k KQ i j k 13.
O z Z
11 ( 3)
3 3
K 3 10 9 KQ 14. 6
EX i0 T cos + q B = mg
11
3 /2
3
3
3 T cos = mg – q B
3 T sin = q A
Q – 3 109 C
11
Y component is
K 10 9 KQ qB
Ey T
11
3 3 3
qA
K 3 3 10
3
9 9
K 10
–
11 11 3
3 3 3
mg
9
2K 10 Dividing (i) and (ii), we get
Ey
11 3
qA
(Y-component not equal to zero ) tan
mg qB
mg tan
1 1 q 6 102 C
10. W = Kqq0 r – r = 1.2 J A+B tan
B A
kq
Potential at A VA 15. 5
r
9 109 8 10 3 putting the value of q in (ii),
24 10 8 v
.03 A mg sec
Potential at B T 5 102 N
A B tan
9 109 8 10 3
VB 18 10 8 v
.04
W.D. = –2×10–9 (18 × 108 – 24 × 108)
W.D. = 1.2 J
2kQ 2
16.
mR
Q
11. K/2qD
v=0
12. 4d
–Q
www.motion.ac.in
74 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
Qq K q a=1m q
17. (a) 4 K (b)
0 m Kq2
Kq2 Kq2
U1
From energy conservation a a a
kqQ
K.E ......(1) 3Kq2
R U1
a
KqQ Q q
R min R Kq2 Kq2 kq2
K.E 40 K U2
a/2 a a/2
5Kq2
Rmin U2
Nucleus a
2Kq2
1 KQq Change in P.E.
K.E mv2 a
2 2R 9 2
from eq. .....(1) 2 9 10 (0.1)
= 18 × 107
KQq 1
K 1000 J Energy is supplied in 1 sec.
R
18 10 7
1 K.E 18 × 107
K.E mv2 1000
2 2 = 1.8 × 105 sec.
K.E
v
m kq2
20. – (3 – 2 )
a
Q2 Ist Case for calculation of P.E. make pair with
18. each and every charge make sure no pair is
m 0 V 2
repeated.
u Q Q U0 = U12 + U23 + U13 + U14 + U24 + U34
m Kq2 Kq2 Kq2 Kq2 Kq2 Kq2
U0
rmin a a 2a a 2a a
from M.C. 2mu = mv
4Kq2 2Kq2 Kq2
v
U0
a
2a
a
4 2
u
2 q
1 1 KQ2
from E.C. mv 2 2 mv 2 2a
2 2 rmin
q q
1 mv 2 KQ2
mv 2
2 4 rmin
Q2 q
rmin
m 0 v 2 IInd Case
4Kq2 2Kq2
U
2a 2a
W.D. = –(U)
Kq2 Kq2 4Kq2 Kq2
2 2 2
a a a a
Kq2
a
3 2
394-Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota
Electrostatics Part-I 75
4Kq2 3 1 4a
3 22.
21. (i) a
3
2 3
Given that a is the
2Kq2 3 1 radius of disk, is the H
(ii) Wel a
3 s urface c harg e (m,q)
2 3
de ns i t y and
Kq2 3 1
(iii) 3 q / m 40g / . The H
2ma 2 3 kinetic energy of the
2Kq2 3 1 part i c l e , when i t
(iv) 3 reaches the disk, can O a
ma 2 3
be taken as zero.
Potential due to a
Kq2 3 1
(v) 3 charged disk at any
ma 2 3 axial point situated at
a distance x from O
nU1
Total Energy = (n = no. of corner) is
2
8 3Kq2 3Kq2 Kq2 2
V(x) a x2 x
20
2 a 2a 3a
4kq2 3 1 2 2
Total energy 3 Hence, V(H) 2 a H H
a 2 3 0
www.motion.ac.in
76 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
24 0 v = 400 (n 2)
2
v 20 n2
2 2 0 2 0
2 0 A B 2 0
2
2 0
2 0 7K K
2 0 26. |E| = ,V = [where K = 1/4 0]
8 4
E net A 0
2
E net B
y
0
EA
0
EB
2 0 u 2m A
x
25. E1
q P1=1
E2
2m
z
x2
1 2
x1 E.dr 2 mv E1
2KP 2 1 K K
x1
r3 8 4
x2
KP 3K
E2 3
r 8
7k
Enet
8
KP1 K
Potential at v A
r2 4
kP
2qp
29. (– i – 2j )
27. 2 2y 3
4 0r
KP
E1
o
2y 3
o
90 45
2KP
o
E2
45 y3 2
P
E
KP
2 y3
î 2 ĵ
Potential at point B due to dipole
E1 (0,y)
kp cos 45o k p
vB
r2 2 r2 E2
2kpq
Joule
r2
30. (QL2/2m)1/.2
2KP0 Q KP0 Q
28. (i) (– i ) (ii) j Ey
r3 r3 (0,L)
6KP0P 3KP0P Ex
(iii) i (iv) ( ĵ )
r4 r4 Ey
KQ
E Ex
r2
Q 45
-q0 +q0 (L,0)
r As ring move downward Ex Ey
Force on P0 due to Q is –ve x direction and so at point where qEy sin = qEx cos
dE 2KP0Q After wards ring com reach (L,0) easily
F P (automotic)
dr r3
2KP Q tan x / y x = y
0
F î x = y = L/2
r3
P0 Apply energy concervation between point A
P
q and B
-q0 q0 -q
1
mv2 qV
r 2
2KP V = E.dr
E (due to P)
r3 L /2 L /2
x2
L /2
y2
L /2
V xdx ydy
dE 6KP 6KPP0 0 0 2 0 2 0
F P0 P0 4
dr r r4 L 2
L2 L2
V
6KPP 8 8 4
0
F (î ) 1 L2
r4 mv2 q
2 4
P0 P
1 /2
2qL2 qL2
r v 2
v =
4m 2m
KP q KP0 q 3KP0 q ˆ
F 0
r a 3
r a
3
ˆj
r4
j
3 P1P2
31.
20 x 4 , attaractive
www.motion.ac.in
78 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
kq1q2 W
1. (a) 60° (b) mg + 3. v
2 2(a He )g
(c) 3 mg, mg. q1 & q2 should have un-
W
like charges for the beads to remain T cos + mg = B +V Heg = Vag
2
stationaly & q2q2 = – mgl2/k
W
N1 cos 30 º N2 cos 60º 2Mg or v
2(a He )g
and N1 cos 60 º N2 cos 30º
2Mg cos 30 º
N1 3 Mg 1/ 2
(cos 2 30º cos 2 60º ) 40a3mg
i.e., q
4.
3L
on solving cos2 30º cos2 60º 1
N1
A
From figure, for the equilibrium of a particle
N2
P along a vertical line, we get
q1 q2 Q
T cos = mg ...(i)
30º 60º While for equilibrium in the plane of equilateral
B C
Horizontol
triangle, we get
kq q
T 12 2 cos Mg sin 30º T sin = 2 F cos 30° ...(ii)
So from Eqs. (i) and (ii), we have
kq1q2
and T sin Mg cos 30º N1
2 3F
tan 3 60º tan ....(iii)
mg
kq q
T 12 2 Mg
For Beads remain in equilibrium
N1 3 Mg and N2 Mg
mg 2
and for, T = 0 q1q2
k
2. q 8W tan 0x2 ,
a
D
or q 8W tan 0x2
a 3 a
So, tan (as L >>a) 2d 2md
L2 (a2 / 3) ( 3)L t or t
a eE
Therefore, we have
On substituting the above values of F and
tan in Eq. (iii) we get
a 3 q2 d
( 3)L mg 40a2
1/ 2
40a3mg
i.e., q te me
3L
tP mp
As me<mp, so te<tp. Hence,
5. 9.30 electron will take less time. i.e., the electron
wins the race.
-12q (ii) Time to cross the paltes is t = /u.
30º
-11q -1q
-10q -2q
30
º Deviation is
30º
-3q 30º E
-9q 2
-4q
30º
30º
1 2 1 eE
-8q y at
-7q -6q
-5q (6 kq / r 2 ) 2 2 m u
By symmetry 2
ye mp up
6 kq or (i)
6kq 6kq 6 kq yP me ue
E 2 2 2 cos30º 2 2 cos60º 2 2 cos90º ( ˆi)
r r r r
6kq a. If up = ue, then
E 2 (1 3 1) ˆi
r
ye mp
4kq yp me
6. – i
R 2 As mp > me, so
dE 2dE cos ( î ) ye> yp. Hence, the deviation of the
electrron will be more.
k /2 k / 2
E
R2 0
cos R d
R 0
cos d
k /2 k
sin 0 ye
R R
yp
b. From Eq. (i)
2
k q ye mpup
E î & 1 (as given)
R yp meu2e
R
4 Hence, the deviation of both the electron
4k q
E î and the proton will be the same.
R2
c. From Eq. (i).
2
ye mpup me me
yp meue mp mp
As me < mp, so ye < yp. Hence, the deviation
of proton will be more.
www.motion.ac.in
80 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
2 d R1
8. H2 = h1 + h2 – g d R 2
V
Where Q = total charge
vt t dU
v For Umin 0
h h 2 dq
1
h 2 1 2
g from C.M. 2q 2(Q q) ( 1)
2 2 v 0 K (Q q) q
R1 R2
Say q = q1 and Q – q1 = q2
COM 2q 2q q q1
h2 – h 1 0 1 2 2
R1 R2 d
h1 d is very large
h=?
q1 q q R
d/2 2 1 1
R1 R 2 q2 R 2
g 2 12. W f i r s t
h h1 h2 2
v 8 4 Kq2
s t e p
= – ,
3 5 r
9. 4 0Ka Wsecond step=0, Wtotal=0
k = k2 – k1 Distance between charges 1 & 4 & 2 & 3 don’t change
= p1 – p2
1 q2 kq2 kq2 4 kq2 kq2 8 4
= w1st U 2
3
4 0 a r (3 r ) 5r r 5
{Interaction energy between Ist and IIst 4 kq2 4 kq2
charge} WIInd u2 u3 0
5 r 5 r
= q k ( 4 0 ) a1 / 2 1
2
step Ist
10. 2.2× 10 -12
C
E x 3
E 0 î
4
E0 step IIIrd
Incoming flux = (0) a 2 = 0
th
E0 step IV
Outgoing flux = (a) a 2
q E0
a3 Wfinal ui uf
0
0 E0 a3 kq 2 kq2 2 2
q 2 2 kq kq 0
r 3 r r 3 r
12
8.85 10 5 10 3
[10 2 ]3 v
2 10 2 13.
3
q 2.2 10 12 C 3
( Px )1 q1E x t mv
4
Q1 R1 q1 3
11.
Q 2 R2 ( Px )2 q2 E x t mv q2 4
k 3
U
R
q dq p y 1 mv and p y 2 mv
4
kq 2 k ( Q q) 2 kq (Q q) 3
U mv
2 R1 2R 2 d q v
4 1 v
kq 2 k (Q q)2 kq (Q q) mv q2 3
2 R1 2R 2 d ( p y )1 q1 E y t
( p x )2 q2 E y t
Ip 2 E0 R 2
15. R E0 i
2E0 R 2
x = R sin ....(2)
and dF = dq E Ip
= E(Rd) × By (1) & (2)
d = dFx
2E0 R 2 f R 2 E0 R2
++
( I cm MR 2 ) 2 MR 2
+
+ y
+
+ f R E 0R 2
––
x x
R – f E 0R î
–
–
––
d = E0 × R2 sin d 3 p1p2
16. 40 x 4 , Repulsive
/2
2
= 2E0 R sin d
0 17.
3 2Qp
(upward), U =
Q2
pQ
2
3
0a 2 20a 2 0a
[ cos ]0 / 2 2 E0 R 2 2 E0 R 2
I CM 2 E0 R 2 f R
2 E0 R 2 f R
...(1)
I CM
www.motion.ac.in
82 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
1. A
1 q q q
Suppose that a point B, where net electric 1
q
field is zero due to the charges 8q and -2q. 4 o R R d2
2 4 o R R d2
2
q 1 1
O
+8q -2q
2o R R d
2 2
B
x=a x=0 x=L
A
3. D
Electric field due to a charged conducting
1 8q sheet of surface density is given by E =
EBO . î
4o a2
1 2q o r
EBA . î
4 o (a L)2
+
+
According to condition, +
+
+
EBO EBA 0 +
+ F=QE
+ B
1 8q 1 2q +
+
2
+
4 o a 4 o (a L)2 + mg
+
R R tan
d 5. A
A B Since V2>V1 so electric field will point from
plate 2 to plate 1.
1 q q The electron will experi-
, d1 R 2 d2 0.1m
= 4 R d ence an electric force,
o 1
opposite to the direction
of electric field, and hence E
1 q q
move towards the plate 2.
4 o R ....(1)
R d2
2
use work-energy theorem
to find speed of electron
1 q q when it strikes the plate
Similarly, VB= 4
R
o R 2 d2 2.
Potential difference, VA-VB 1 2
mev 2
0 e(V2 V1 )
2
394-Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota
Electrostatics Part-I 83
F1 F2 as E is non-uniform. 11. B
Torque would also be non-zero. Work done by conservative force does not
depend on the path. Electrostatic force is a
7. D conservative force.
V V V
E î ĵ k̂ 12. D
x y z
W=QdV=Q(Vq-VP)
V d 20 =-100 x (1.6 x 10-19) x (-4-10)
Ex = +100 x 1.6 x 10-19x 14
x dx x2 4
= +2.24 x 10-16 J
40x
13. A
(x2 4)2
Three forces F41, F42 and F43 acting on Q as
10 shown resultant of F41+F43.
Ex at x 4m V / m
9 2Feach
and is along positive x-direction. 1 Qq
2
4 o d2
8. D
Resultant on Q becomes zero
Direction of E reverses while magnitude only when q charges are F47
q F41
remains same and V remains unchanged. Q
of negative nature.
9. B 1 QxQ F43
Potential at A due to charge at O F4.2
y 4 o ( 2d)2
Q q
( 2, 2) dQ Q x Q
2
d2 2d2
QxQ
2 xq
B 2
X
O (0,0) (2,0) Q
3
q
1 (10 ) 2 2
VA
4o OA Q
or 2 2
q
1 (10 3 )
.
4 o ( 2 )2 ( 2 )2
www.motion.ac.in
84 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
14. C 15. A
q 2kqQ 2k(q)Q
Linear charge density = r Ui
a 5a
y
1 2qQ 1
. 1
4o a 5
Uf = 0
1Q
q q
x
5a
2a
K.dq
E dE sin ( ĵ) r 2
sin ( ĵ)
K qr -q 2a -q
r r
E 2
d sin ( ĵ)
By conservation of energy
K q
sin (ˆj) Gain in KE = loss in PE
r
2
0
q 1 2qQ 1
(ˆj) K . 1
2 or 2
2
4o a 5
d. C 16. D
From F.B.D. of sphere, using Lami’s theorem At any instant,
T cos = mg ...(i)
F
= tan .....(i) ka2
mg
T sin = Fe = ...(ii)
When suspended in liquid, as remains same, x2
F'
= tan ....(ii)
mg1
d
T T
Using (i) and (ii)
Fe Fe
x
F F' F mg mg
= where, F’ = K
mg mg1 From Eqs. (i) and (ii)
d
ka2
mg tan
F F' x2
=
mg mg x 2 x
mgK1 q2 . .x tan
d k 2l 2l
mg 3
1 q2 x ...(iii)
or K = =2 2kl
1
d mg 2 dx
2q 3 x
2kl dt
1/2
mg 3 dq 3mg 2
2 x x v
2Kl dt 2Kl
1/2
mg 3
q x
2kl
v x 1 / 2
17. A 19. A or B
F F
3V0/2
q/2
V0
y
q q
x
a a r=R
Fnet 2F cos θ
3V0 5V0 3V V
kq(q / 2) y R1 ; R2 ; R3 0 ; R 4 0
2 2 . 2 2 4 4 4
(a y ) (a y2 )1 / 2
2
2 2
~ kq .y ~ kq .y KQ
(a2 y2 )3 / 2
a3
rR V
2R 3
3R 2 r2
Fnet y 3V0
v , R1 0
2
18. A
R
5V0 KQ
dv = E.dr 4
2R 3
3R 2 R 22 R2
2
2 2 r>R
2 x3
VA – V0 =
0
30x dx =–
30
3
0
3V0 KQ
R3
4KQ KQ R R
4 R3 3V0 3 KQ 3
= – [10x3] = – 10 [8 – 0]
VA – V0 = –80 J V0 KQ 4KQ 4KQ
4
R4 R 4 V KQ R 4R
0
On comparing we get
(A) or (B)
20. C
Tangent to the electrical field lines will give
us the direction at a given point.
www.motion.ac.in
86 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
1. C 1 /3
1
R q/3
3
0 30° +Q
6
sin
2R
–2q/3 mp(1) x0 mp(2)
2R
60° 8. C
Fx
q/3 45°
kq1q2 k(q / 3) (2q / 3)
FCB 45°
r2 3R 2
2kq2 q2 Fy
F 2
Fx = Fy qE = mg
27R 54 0R 2
v mgd
3. A,D q = mg V = = 10–9 v
d q
Lines emerging from Q1 +ve
Lines terminate at Q2 – ve
9. D
no. of lines originate or terminate depends on mag-
Inside shell E = 0
nitude of charge
& V = const.
Q1 13 and outside shell
Q 9 Q1 Q2
2
1 1
E.f.=0 E &v
Now situation is r2 r
+Q1 +Q2
4. A 10. A,B,C
5. D
m = 4/3 r3
q = mg 6rv = mg
6. 3
L
2kq2 kq2
2Ta = + 2 2 cos 45
2 2a
a
2Ta
45° 45°
2
kq kq
2
kq
2
kq
2
Can be simplified to
2
2a a
2
a
2 2a
2
kq2 1
Ta = 1
a2 2 2
2q
60°
4q
60° = 6q E
Q3, Q4 –ve
2q
k(6q) 1 6q
E = 4 L2 = 6 K
L2 0
Q2, Q4 –ve
(Q) Q1, Q2 +ve
www.motion.ac.in
88 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
1. C 11. C
E depends on distribution of charge but
q in
doesn't depend on distribution qin.
Electric flux E.dS 0
qin is the charge
2. C S
Gauss law is valid for all distribution either enclosed by the Gaussian-surface which, in
symmetric or not. the present case, is the surface of given
3. B sphere. As shown, length AB of the line lies
y
inside the sphere.
^
E = eE0x i
E B
E x
O' y
z O
Incoming flux in = E0 (0) = 0
A R
Out going flux out = E0 (a2)
q q
net = out – in = (y < R)
0 0
q = 0 E0 a2 In OO’A R2 = y2 + (O’A)2
4. C
O’A = R 2 y2
Area lying in X, Y plane means A = A k̂
A 100 k̂ , E î 2 ĵ 3 k̂ and AB = 2 R 2 y 2
= E A
Charge on length AB = 2 R 2 y 2 ×
= i 2 j 3 k 100 k
= 100 3 2 R 2 y 2
electric flux = E.dS
0
5. D S
Incoming flux = Outgoing flux
6. C 12. C
When the two conducting spheres are
q connected by a conducting wire, charge will
Flux
0 flow from one sphere (having higher potential)
q = a2dx to other (having lower potential) till both
acquire the same potential.
q = a2 dx dx
Therefore
= a (area under curve)
2
0 0 0 V
E
q = a2 8 2 8 r
3 2 E1 r 2
1 2 :1
q= a 0 E2 r2 1
4
3 / 4a20 3
= =
0 4 13. B
7. A From symmetry flux through each point of
the sphere is same.
E ds , R 2E
q
8. D Flux through whole sphere =
qin= 0 o
=0
9. B
10. A
15. D
R q q 5q
6 0 24 0 24 0
q
16. C
The magnitude of electric field intensity due
1 to each part of the hemisphorical surface
2
Total surface area = 4R 4 4 m2 at the centre 'O' is same. Suppose, It is
E.
\ flux through 0.2 m2 is
E E
q / o q E+ + = E0
0 .2 2 2
=
4 20 o 2E = E0 30° 30°
E E
\ (B) E0 2 2
E
E E
14. A 2
Flux through the cube is maximum when the
charge inside it is maximum.
17. D
h
E =0
q
b
l 18. C
qin
Charge associated with wire Q l E • dA 0
\ Q is maximum when l is maximum. E due to charge inside or outside charge.
So for maximum flux wire should be placed 19. D
along the diagonal of cuboid. Radius of the cutting
disc = R 2 x2
Length of diagonal = L2 B 2 H 2
charge onRdisc
q = A
Qmax L2 B 2 H 2 q = (R2x– x2)
max (1) q (R 2 x 2 )
o o Now = =
0 0
Similarly for minimum flux the wire should be 20. B
placed along height (h). qin q2 q3
= - 36 103
o o
h<b<l
21. A
Charge revolve only due to electric field of
Qmin h inner shell.
min (2)
o o 2k q
= q, v= 20m
r
From (1) and (2)
22. A
max l 2 b 2 h2 In a conductor given charge is distributed
uniformly on the outer surface of sphere
min h
23. B
\ (A)
Depends on body either conductor or non-
conducting.
www.motion.ac.in
90 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
24. A 29. D
Remain in the car, which provide electrostatic Let the spherical conductors B and C have
shielding. As we know that effect of external same charge as q. The electric force between
them is
electric field inside conductor is zero.
1 q2
F
4 o r 2
25. B
Here r, being the distance between them.
F1 = F2 (inside Conductor E = 0) When third uncharged conductor A is brought
k qd (qb + qc ) in contact with B,then charge on each
F3 = conductor
r2
q qB 0q q
qA qB A
2 2 2
26. C When this conductor A is now brought in
The dotted lines may be surface boundary of contanct wi th C, then charge on each
a conductor. Electric lines of force do not conductor
enter a conductor. Potential of a conductor q qC (q / 2) q 3q
qA qC A
is constant but not necessarily zero. 2 2 4
It may be zero also. So, Point P may be inside Here, electric force acting between B and C
a conductor (solid or hollow). is
1 qB qC 1 (q / 2)(3q / 4)
F'
27. A 4o r 2
4o r2
The distribution of charge on the outer 3 1 q2 3F
surface, depends onl y on the charges 8 4 o r 2 8
outside, and it distributes itself such that
the net electric field inside the outer surface 30. D
32. C 37. A
Electrostatic shielding.
q1 So VA – VB doesn't change.
38. C
From concept of uniformly charged solid
q sphere
3 kQ
VC =
2 R
Potential at distance r is V
The net potential on the surface of earthed Vc
conductor is zero. Now V =
2
q1 q kQ 3 kQ 4R
V = 4 r 4 d 0 = r=
0 0
r 4 R 3
4R R
q1 q Distance from surface = R =
– 3 3
4 0r 4 0d
39. A
40µC 20µC
qr
q1 = –
d
33. B
k(40)(20)
+Q F1 =
–Q d2
+Q –q After touching the charge on sphere = 10µC
–Q Will force
aQ 10µC 10µC
k(10)(10)
b F2 =
d2
From distribution of charge
F1 : F2 = 8 : 1
Charge on inner surface of outer shell = –Q
and outer surface = Q – q 40. D
Radius of single drop = r
34. D 4
Potential at every point inside then total volume = n r3
3
= potential at surface Now radius of big drop = R
k(Q q) 4
VS = Volume = R3
b 3
4 4
n r3 = R3
35. B 3 3
R = n1/3r .... (i)
v = const.
rV
k
Q
Charge on single drop q =
= 10V vin = 10V K
R
m
5c
nrV
Total charge = nq =
k
36. C Final potential of big drop
– + knq knrV
– + Vfinal = = = n2/3 V
+ ++ – C + R kn1/3r
++
+ ––
++ ++ 41. D
Use above formula in Q.26
V' = n2/3 V
= (1000)2/3 (1)
VC = +VC (due to charge body)
V' = 100 V
www.motion.ac.in
92 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
42. A 47. D
As we connect A and B through wire with C.
43. A Then all the charge on A and B move towards
From notes electric + + C so qA = 0, qB = 0
+
field in a cavity 3 + + + qC = Q + q1 + q2
c/m +
+ 48. D
+
E = 3
0
+ + + It is clear from figure q' charge given to earth
+
q + + + surface and also Vc = 0
F = qE =
3 0 + + b = 2a, c = 3a, d = 4a
kq kq kq'
44. A Vc = 0
3a 4a 3a
Given potential at A is 5V
10V and potential at B is q
10V q' =–
5V Now potential at 4
a
centre is 10V because kq kq kq '
b Now vA =
i n hol l ow s phere 2a 4a 3a
potential is constant kq
from centre of surface. VA =
6a
45. B –q
q1 –q2
R q q'
R
a
r = 0.5 m b
kq1q2 c
Given = 0.108 .... (i)
r2
d
Now after connecting through a conducting
wire the final charge gets half
q1 q2 q1 q2 kq kq
VA – VC = –0=
2 2 6a 6a
49. C
Electric field lines enter and exit perpendicular
to the conductor body.
r = 0.5m
50. D
k(q1 q2 )2
Given = 0.036 .... (2)
4r 2 dV
After solving equation (1) & (2) will get the E= =
2 0 x 2 0 3a x dx
answer.
dx dx
46. C dV 2 x 3a x
Potential of shell A is 0
kQ A kQB kQC
=
a
+
b
+
c
...(i) =
2 0
ln x 2a a ln 3a x 2aa
Now QA = –4a 2
QB = 4b2
C
B
A –
–
+
a
C
b
= ln 2 ln 2 = ·2 ln 2 = VA– VB
2 0 2 0
QC = –4c2
q0 ln 2
1 work = (VA – VB) q0 =
k = 4 0
0
Put QA, QB, QC and k in equation (i)
VA = b a c
0
394-Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota
Electrostatics Part-II 93
Exercise - II
Level - I
1. C q in a
and …(1)
= . ds
which is answer (A).
N
= m2
C
= volt – m
2. D
Since field is uniform, the net flux for the a a a
closed surface is zero.
(A) (B) (C)
\ (D)
In case the string is kept parallel to the
diagonal of a face, as shown in Fig. (B), the
3. B
length of string inside will be
Qenc
From Gauss’s law E a2 a2 2 a
0 Therefore, the flux will be
4. D q in 2 a
…(2)
Qenc = 100 × s
σ which is answer (B).
E= Þ s = 200 × 2Î0 However, if the string is kept along a
2 0
diagonal of the cube, as shown in Fig. (C),
= 4 × 104 Î0 = 35.4 × 10–8 C the length of the string inside becomes
a2 a 2 a2 3 a
5. A This is the maximum length that can fit in
Body diagonal of a cube the cube. Hence,
= HB = DF = a 3 q in 3 a
…(3)
a 3
FN = which is answer (D).
2
Obviously, out of (1), (2) and (3), the flux in
The Gaussian surface will be a cylinder of
(3) is maximum. Hence answer (D) is
a 3 correct.
radius and lenght .
2
a 3 7. C
E.2 2
0 Electric field at any point on the surface of
Gaussian surface is due to enclosed charge
as well as charge placed outside it.
E= 3a 0
8. A
6. D 4xˆi 6 yˆj
As per Gauss’ law, the total flux through a
closed surface equal s the net charge qin
.dA 4 6 2
enclosed by the surface divided by e0, 0
q in qin 20
If the string is kept parallel to one edge, as
shown in the length of string inside the cube
will be a. So,
qin = la
www.motion.ac.in
94 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
9. B 17. B
1 2 1 cos 60 = 1 1
E 2 times
r 4
2 2(1 cos 90) = 2
q1 18. D
Flux from q1 = 4
0
q2 kq
v1
Flux from q2 = 2 r1 v1 r2
0
kq v = r
Outward = inward v2 2 2 1
r
q1 2
q2 1
19. D
V' = (n)–2/3V
10. A
20. B
11. A
= E. ds V'
= EdS × cos = (n)–2/3
V
= 20 × 8 × cos 60° = 80
21. B
12. A
Since qen = 0; =0
13. C 22. D
Electric flux due to outside charge will be Electric field inside the conductor will be zero.
zero. But elecric field will be due to all the Either external electric field is present or not.
charges. Hence potential at every point must be same.
Charge distribution depends on external field
14. D 1
and (when no electric field)
KQr r
E=
R3
23. D
15. D +Q +++
++++
+
Enet = 0
+ ++
–5Q +2Q v=0 Q
+4Q –2Q –5Q –Q
–2Q –4Q +
4Q –2Q + ++
4Q
24. D
25. C +q
26. A
In the charge reach at point B then it will 2
automatically reach at point C. F= A
2 0
A B C at equilibrium
R/2
2
2 2 4 R
2
(4R ) =
+Q 2 0 2 0 4
Energy Conservation between A & B ' = 2 (–ve)
1
qvA + mv2 = qvB
2
2 R2 29. D
kQ 3R = 11kQ
VB =
2R 3 4 8R
+Q –3Q
1 11kQ kQ R R
Now mv2 = q
2 8R R
A B
6kQ
v= ...(i)
8Rm KQ kQ kQ 3
EB = 2 Enet = EA EB = 2
4 1 r r r2
Now put Q = × R3 and k = 4 4 4
3 0
Put value of Q and k in equation (i) we get
30. A
R 2
v=
4m 0 Kq RV
V= ;q=
R K
27. B
Kq K RV RV
A E= = =
R r e2 Kr 2 r2
C d
31. B
d cos = r
kp kp cos 2
vA = vC = =
d2 r2
R R
28. A
Balancing occur only when –ve charge occur
in inside conductor. Kq 4Kq
E= = 2
(r / 2)2 r
F
++
++ 2Kq 2 Er 2
+ Vtotal = = = Er
+ r /2 4r / 2
F
++++
–––
++++
V = Er
–––
––
–
––
+
+
++ ++
+
2
Pelec. =
2 0
www.motion.ac.in
96 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
32. B 34. C
P1 P2 P3
E.F. between P1 and
P2 is zero q0 0 –q q q
r1 r2
E1 = E2
v
Kq1 Kq2 q1 r1
2 35. B
= or q = Vcos
2 2 + + + +
r1 r2 2 r2
u
E
V1 Kq1 r2 r1
2
r2 – – – –
V2 = Kq2 × r1 = r2 × r u cos
1
Since, No force acts along hori zontal
direction.
V1 r1
V2 = r2 Horizontal comp. of velocity remains same,
u cos = V cos
33. A u cos
Q Q V=
cos
mu2
10d – d/2
K.Ei 2 u2
10d
K.Ef = 1 = 2
kqQ mv2 2 cos
Net force on charge q = 2 u
(10d d / 2)2 cos2
qQ K.Ei 2
cos
361 0 d2 K.Ef = cos
Exercise - II
Level - II
1. A,B,C 12. AC
E = 100 r qin = 0
q
E . dA in
0
qin
E A Circle is perpendicular
bisector to dipole.
EdA cos 180° = –q +q
0
qin = –ve
|qin| = EdA 0 = 3 × 10–13 C
2. A,B,C
q
E . dA in Q2
0 Q1 13. A,C,D
Fl ux e l e ct ri c 100V 75V
fi e l d d ue t o A B
charge lie inside R 5cm
or out side the surface. But is only due to R + 10
charge lie inside the surface.
kQ
Given 100 = ..... (1)
3. A, C R 0.05
kQ
4. ABCD 75 = ..... (2)
Gauss law R 0.10
from (1) & (2) R = 10 cm
5. A,D 5
Flux due to charge which is outside will be zero. Q= × 10–9 C
q 3
. dA in
0
Again VS =
KQ
= 150 V
electric field due to all the charges. R
6. A,B 3 kQ
In conductor given charge inside is spread VC = = 225 V
2 R
its outer surface
1 kQ
Potential will be same E= = 1500 V/m
rc R2
Electric field near the surface = 14. A,C,D
0
Where = Local charge density 2Q
+Q+Q=2Q =
1
4R 2
r
7. ABC Q
Q A =
Charge is distributed over the surface of B 2R 2
conductor in such a way that net field due
to this charge and outside charge q is zero 1
EA only due to inside charge
inside. Field due to only q is non-zero. r2
EB due to charge (inside + outside)
8. BC
+
++
+ ++
10. A,B,C A
+
+
+ ++
11. C,D
www.motion.ac.in
98 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
R
3. a= 6. 40 V-m
3
E = 2 × 10 k̂
3
a = E. ds
cos =
R 2 a2 = 2 × 103 k̂ .0 × 20 × 10–4 × k̂
So solid angle = 2 (1 – cos ) = 4 × 10 = 40 V – m
a
7. /2
= 2 1
a2 R 2
q
Let flux from 4 solid angle = =
0
then from flux in
a q
2 1
= (Halved) (halved)
4 a2 R 2
a
=
Now given 2 1
4
a R2
2 4 8. 3 /0
2
3a = R 2
qmax 3
max = 0 = 0
R
4.
2 0
+
+ 9. q / 20
+
+ x dx
10. q / 20
+ R
dx 11. E
Flux passing through the area 2 × dx
Kq 1 q
k E= 2 = 4 × 2
= (2 × dx) R 0 R
x
R
Now compute flux = 2k dx E= E
0 0
R
= 2kR = 2 Since = const.
0
E = const.
Q
17. 4 0 R
EP = 0 Applying generator principle, total charge of
inner conductor transfers to outer one on
x Qx
+ E = Q
2A0 2A 0 connection and hence VB = 4 R
0
x Q
A = 2A – E
0 0
18. –2C
Q Q
x= – EA0 and Q – x = + EA0 Kq kq1
2 2 Potential at the inner sphere, V = +
3r r
Q
So charge on one side is – EA0 and other
2 q
Q q1
side + EA0
2
www.motion.ac.in
100 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
q kqQ mR 3
Now, V = 0 q1 = = –2C F qE x, T 2
3 R3 KQq
kqQ
ma = 3 x
q Qq R
19. 2 (Non Uniform), (Uniform) kqQ
4R 1 4R 22 =
mR 3
+ + 1 kqQ
+ n=
+ Q+q 2 mR 3
+
+
+ – – ––
–q – 23. 9V0
– q – +
+ – Let us assume radius of smaller drop is r and
–
– –– bigger drop is R.
+ – – –– +
4 4
+ + 27 r3 = R3
+ 3 3
+ + R = 3r ....(1)
kq V0r
Due to induction, –q will induce on inner Now = V0 q0 =
surface of shell. As the total charge of shell is r k
Q so charge on outer surface in electrostatic 27V0r
Total charge Q = 27q0 =
equilibrium condition is Q + q. k
The charge distribution on inner surface of shell kQ
Now potential of bigger drop V =
would be NU, because electric field at any R
outside point, (r > R1) due to inside charges k 27V0r
(q & –q) has to be zero which is possible only V= = 9V0
3r k
when –q is distributed non - uniformly.
r1
24. (i) r q
q2 1 1 2
20. A
8 a b r
0 (ii) Charge on inner shell = – 1 q and
r2
charge on the outer shell = q
Q
21. 2 0 r
(iii) Charge flown in to the earth = 1 q
r2
q + q'
/2 –q'
q'
r1
Flux minimum when length minimum. r2
half length of rod inside the cube so it contain
Q/2 charge we know that potential of grounded sphere
qin Q is zero.
= = 2 Potential of inner sphere = 0
0 0
q' charge redistribute exact distribution shown
in figure
1 qQ
22. kq kq' r1
2 4 0mR 3 + = 0 , q' = –q
r
r2 r1 2
+++
+++++ (i) charge on inner surface of outer shell =
+++
x
+ r
+++ ++ q 1
++++
r2
kQr r
EF inside the sphere = (ii) charge on inner shall = – q 1
R3 r2
force at distance x from centre is r
(iii) charge flow into the earth = – q 1
r2
kq kq1 b kq1
25. v VQ = –
r r a r
+q aV
27.
b
O –q
q Let charge on inner conductor is Q, then V =
P
Q
K . Using generator principle, the entire
a
charge Q transfers to outer sphere, then
kq kq kq kq potential of outer sphere is given by,
VP = – + , VP =
r r r r Q Va
V’ = k =
b b
b
26. (i) q2 – q1 ; (ii)
a
28. 1.125 q
q1 1 1 Spheres are identical then after touching
Vr – ; ar b charge on each sphere is same.
4 0 r a
q 1 1 6q 3q 3q
Vb 1 – ; r b Ist A & B then q1 = =
4 0 b a 2 2
nd
3q / 2 0 3q
II A & C then q2 = =
Vr 1 q1 q2 ; r b 2 4
4 0 r r 3q / 4 3q / 2 9
IIIrd C & B then q3 = = q
2 8
Charge given = Q
Q + q1 29. zero
–q1
q1 b q1
q1 a
–q 1
a P
r
b r
Q
bq
k q1 1
kq1 kq1 a
VP = – +
r b b
kq1 kq1
VP = –
r a
b
k q1 q1
kq1 kq1 a
VQ = – +
r r r
www.motion.ac.in
102 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
1. 2 5. 105 NC–1 m2
When net electric field is zero. Electric field strength at a point in plane of
Kq a K(2 / 5)3 / 2 q a ring depends upon its distance from centre
2 2 3/2
of the ring. Magnitude of electric field is same
(a a ) (b2 a2 )3 / 2
at all those points which are equidistant from
1 1 the centre and co-planer with the ring.
2 3/2 = Therefore, consider a coplanar and concentric
(2a ) 2
3/2
1 53 / 2 E
23 / 2 a3 23 / 2 (b2 a2 )3 / 2 r
x
q
(b + a ) = 5
2 2 3/2 3/2
a3
R
b2 + a2 = 5a2
b = 2a
a
Inclination of
E with the normal to surface
4. 40aR.
of the ring
In accordance with the Gauss theorem, the
a
required charge is equal to the flux of E considered is given by cos =
r
through this sphere, divided by 0. In our case,
Flux passing through this ring is d =
we can determine the flux as follows. Since
the field E is axisymmetric (as the field of a E dS
uniformly charged filament), we arrive at the or d = E dS cos
conclusion that the flux through the sphere
1 q a
of radius R is equal to the flux through the = 4 2 2
(2x dx)
0 (a x ) 2 2
lateral surface of a cylinder having the same a x
radius and the height 2R, and arranged as Hence, total flux passing through the given
shown in Fig. Then ring is
x R aq x dx qa 1 1
q = 0 E dS = 0
ErS, = x 0 2 0 (a 2 x 2 )3 / 2
= 2
0
a a2 R2
where Er = a/R and S = 2R•2R = 4R2.
= 105 NC–1 m2 Ans.
Finally, we get
q = 40aR.
2K 1000e
6. 0, ,0 v (velocity of one electron)
r m
for r < a
q ne ne
qin Given i
t=
E.ds
0
t t i
Now Impulse = change in momentum
F.t = n mv
a nmv nm i 1000e
b F= =
t ne m
Gaussian surface of F = 7.5 × 10–9 N.
radius r < a
Qq
qin = 0 8. 2 0 L
E=0
dq = 2 r dx
for b > r > a
K2rdx
dv
E.ds q in 0 (r 2 x 2 )1/ 2
l r R xR
2r.E r
0 x n h
cb / m
Gaussian surface of L
radius r < a R dx
r
r x
– cb / m
h
2k
E
r
K 2 xRdx 2 KRdx
(small part of length l of long cyclinder) dv dv
for r > b x R2 2
1/ 2
(R 2 h2 )1/ 2
n 2 x 2
cb / m n
Gaussian after integration
surface
2 KRL
v
r (R2 h2 )1/2
– cb / m
Q
& R2 + h2 = L2
R(R h2 )1/ 2
qin = 0 (because equal & opposite charge on
Q
cyclinder) v
E=0 2 0L
qQ
7. 7.5 × 10–9 N So now energy required = qv =
2 0L
v 500
E= =
d d
qE 500e 9. [3, 19.6 ms–2 downward, 5.7 × 10–5 ms–1.]
a=
m dm
from v2 – u2 = 2ad 10. [10(1/4)1/3 cm]
1000e
v2
m
www.motion.ac.in
104 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
1/ 2
2KQq r – R 3 6 2mr 0
11. 13.
mR r 8 ea
kQ kQ R r a ea
v A – vB = – = kQ F e ae
r R rR 3 0 3 0m
kQ d 2r
vC – vB = (R 2 r 2 )
2R 3 1
{in derivation} from d = aet2
2
kQ 2 R 2 3kQ
v C vB R F=qE
2R 3 4 8R d Cavity
conservation of energy r r e
45°
1 2
Now q(vc – vA) = mv
2
3kQ kQ(R r ) 1 2
q 2 mv
8R rR
1/ 2 1 e a 2
2qkQ r R 3 2r t
v 2 3 0m
mR r 8
6 2 r 0m
12. Proof t
ea
r
(a) dq = (4 r2 dr) 0
R
b 3
Q R
r a
dq 4r 2 dr 0 14. (1) 3 ,(2)a. 3 r (r a)
0 0
R 0 0 r a
r
0 R 3 b 3
R
b. 3 r (r a)
dr 0 r r a
r (i) The electric field within the cavity or outside
is the superposition of the electric field due
to the original uncut sphere, plus the electric
R field due to a sphere of the size of the cavity
R
but with a uniform negative charge density.
40 3 4 the effective charge distribution is composed
Q r dr Q 40 . R = R3...(1)
R 0 R 4 0 of a uniformly charged sphere of radius R,
charge density , superposed on it is a charge
density – filling the cavity. An electric field
qin
(b) E.ds 0
is E1 is caused by the charge distribution +
q in r
at a point r inside the spherical cavity..
2 0 r 0r 4
dq (4r dr ) R
0
in
0
qin =
R
Gaussian P
surface s E1
r O' E2
r
a
P P P
s s
r
O r
a
0r 4 0 r 2 O O O
E(4 r2) = E ...(2)
R 0 4R0
from eq. (1) and (2)
k Qr 2
E
R4
4 3
b (r a)
1 q(s) 3
E2
3 Section D - Plates
40 s3 40 r a
The resultant electric field is
15. 3Q and 4Q
b
3
E E1 E2 r (r a)
30 r a
www.motion.ac.in
106 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
o KQ
Formula v= n2
Qr12 R L
E
4 oR 4
4. B
Apply shell theorem, the total charge upto dx
x
distance r can be calculated as followed
dq = 4r2.dr. K dQ KQ
dv = = dx
5 r 5 r3 x x L
4r 2.dr. o 4o r 2dr dr
4 2 4 R KQ
2L
dx KQ
r v= = n2
5 r3 L x L
dq q 4o r 2dr dr
L
0
4 R 9. 4
3 4
5 r 1r
4o
4 3 R 4
Q P
kq 1 1 5 r3 r 4
E 2 .4 o
r 4 o r 2 4 3 4R
r 5 r
E o 1
r
A
r
A r2
r
4 o 4 R r2dr ; E (r2) =
2
E(r ) =
0
a
0
a
rdr =
0 2 a
5. C
d A A kQ
Electric field, E = - 2ar E (r2) = 2 [r2 – a2] ; E = 2 r 2 (r2 – a2) + 2
dt 0 0 r
By Gauss's theorem
q A a2 kQ
E (4r ) =
2
q 8oar 3 E = 2 1 r 2 + 2
o
0 r
dq dq dr
x dE a2 A
dV dr dV =0; = kQ
dr 2 0
1
(24 oar 2 )
2
4r 2kQ 0 2 Q0 Q
A= ; = 4 =
= -60a a2 0 a2 2a2
1. C 4. A
/ 2 0
+ –+ +–+
/ 2 0 + –+ +–+
+ –+ +–+
+ –+ +–+
+ –+ +–+
2 –+
2 / 2 0 E net + +–+
0 + –+ +–+
+ –+ +–+
KQ + –+ +–+
2. V' V = potential of bubble ....(1)
a
kQ=Va Potential difference occur when charge is
volume of bubble = 4a 2 t given to inner cylinder.
bu bble 5. D
+ + + +
a
t q
kQ
potential of drop = V' ' .....(2)
R
4 3 3
Volume is const. so R 4a t
3
R = (3a2t)1/3
Put R and kQ from above into equation (2)
1/3
Va a
V '' V E
(3a2 t)1 / 3 3t 3 0
3. A,B,C,D 7. B
for practical purposes earthing part of
electrical curcuit have zero potential
+ + + +
+
+
+ + +
v=const
+ + +
kq/r=V
r
+
+
+ + +
O a R r
www.motion.ac.in
108 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
R Q3
then 5 ...(2)
Q1
kZe from (1) & (2)
electric field at distance r = Q1 : Q2 : Q3 = 1 : 3 : 5
r2
12. 2
K(Ze)
E.F at surface = (independent of a) Given = Kra
R2
r
4kr 3 a
9. B qin = k 4 x 2 a dx
3a
for a = 0 0
qin
d
(r) = – r d dq = 4r2 (r) dr
Now E.ds 0
R
R R
d
Q 4r 2(r ) dr 4 r2 r d dr
dx
0 0 R x
(r )
d
R
r 4kr 3 a kr a 1
E(4r2) = ,E
0 ( 3 a) 0 (3 a)
O R r dr
According to given condition
R 3 R
dr 1 k R a 1 k Ra 1
4 dr 4 dr 2 dr Ze
0
R 0
8 0 (3 a) 0 (3 a)2a 1
2a + 1 = 8 a=2
dR 3 dR 3 3Ze
4 Ze = d
4 3 R 3 13. A
10. C qin
r
=
0
In a non-conductor if is uniform then E
30 qin =charge on half disc + charge of point
We make the nucleus uniformly charge
distributed then a = R in which = d (uniform) a a
, , 0
We make the nucleus uniformly charge 4 4
distributed then a = R in which = d (uniform)
+ charge of rod in the cubical surface
11. B
Q1 Q 2 Q1 Q Q1 Q 3 6 8 a a
2 ( 7 ) = – 2C =
2 5a a 2 4
4R 2 16R 2 36R 2
4 4
4Q1 Q 2 Q1 –2C
from I, II 1 1
Q2 Q1 4Q1 0
Q2 14. A
3 ...(1)
Q1 2 2R 2
F = Pelec. A F R2 F
Q2+Q1 + Q3 20 0
Q1 Q2+Q1
R 2R 3R
16. A,B,C,D
Initially
Q Q
VA VB for x = +a/2 and x = -a/2
flux is symmetric & same
RB also flux is same through
RA y = +a/2 and y = -a/2
qin 3q q q
for net flux q / 0
Fig - 1 0 0
R A > RB
VA < VB z = +a/2 and x = +a/2 are
Q+q Q–q similar so same flux.
V
V
20. 6
RA RB
For c yl i nde r =
M R 2
= R2
Fig - 2
(A) In conductor Enet = 0 at
(B) from fig : 2 QA > QB (To make the E = Ecylinder + Esphere
potential same) = × R2
KQA KQB
(C) R (after connecting) 4 R3
A RB 2k kQ 2 k
2kR 3 8
= 2R 2R 2 = –
K A 4R 2A KB 4R 2B A B 2R 2R
2
= R R
RA RB A B
1 R 23 23R
(D) Use E = = kR 1 – = 4 24 16 6 ...(2)
0 24 0 0
17. C,D
23 R
Also E = 16 K .....(1)
18. A,C,D 0
21. C
KQ 2KQ
E1 = E2 =
R2 R2
4KQ.R KQ
E3 = = E2 > E1 > E3
(2R)3 2R 2
22. C
for x = +a/2 and x = -a/2
flux is symmetric & same r KQ 4KQ
E1 0 2
2
also flux is same through 2 r0 r0
y = +a/2 and y = -a/2 2
qin 3q q q 4K 8K
for net flux q / 0 2r0
0 0 r02 r0
z = +a/2 and x = +a/2 are
similar so same flux.
www.motion.ac.in
110 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
23. C
r KQ 4KQ 26. 6
E1 0 2
2 r0
2
r0 2n
2n
2
360
r
; 60 r 60
360
4K 8K R
2r0
2
r0 r0 3r 40 3r
n=6
24. D Since angle is 60° hence total flux will be
1/6th of total flux.
R2
a 27. A
R1
+ +
t
E is uniform & both its magnitude & direction I I0e RC
depends on a due to the vector nature of E . j(t)
25. C
Right d Right d
force due to (2) force due to (2)
& due to (1) while due to (1) .
Thus Fnet is leftwards. This Fnet is rightwards
SHM No SHM
1. D 8. C
i
j current density inversely proportional
A Vd 1 (d / 2)2 1
to area of cross section Vd 2 d2 4
Vd2 4V
4. C
In series circuit current is same
9. D
n1 Vd2 4 R = AB × 10C ± x %
i = n1eA Vd1 , i = n2eA Vd2 , n = V =
2 d1 1 colour - code
brown – 1
5. C black – 0
r 2 10. B
I' = neA'vd' , A' =
4
R (Resistance decreases which increase of
r 2
temperature)
I' = ne v'
4 d
11. B
r2
I' = ne . 2Vd Given that l = 5 m, d = 10 cm. = 0.1 m.
4
I' = I/2 l 17 108 5
R 5.7 105
A 0.0952
6. D 4
i1 = neAV , i2 = n(2e) Av/4
3neAV
i = i1 + i2 =
4
7. C
i = neAVd
i is same so
A Vd
www.motion.ac.in
112 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
12. B 15. B
During stretching volume remains constant
V I 1
R= =
I V R T1
R
A tan = 1/R= w + T2
A
1 > 2 1
x x
R 1 < R2 2
A'
T1 < T2
A' T R
x
(0.5 x)
16. A
1.5
R=
R'= 4R A
Ax = A'(0.5 + x)
3.5 10 5 50 102
Ax Rsquare =
A' = ....(1) (10 2 )2
0.5 x
14. D
B'coz copper is a conductor
But germanium & Si are semi conductors.
18. B 21. C
A E + ir = 12.5 Volt
2 x
B E + (0.5 × 1) = 12.5
E = 12 volt
8 25
y y 22. D
E – ir = 0
50 50
E – ir = V (Discharging)
x E + ir = V (Charging)
A 2 x
23. A
L
25 50 50 2A R=
= A 2L 2A
R=
A
8
1V
y
B 8V
25 45 2L L
Req. = 2 + +8=
2 2
8V 2.4V
1V
junction
R R/4
19. B
Let I be the current flow
V V
R1 2 R1 4 8 – IR – IR/4 = 1
A
v
28
R2 R2 I=
5R
R 28
8– × R = Vj
5R
V V V
Vj = 2.4V
2R1 = 2R 2 + 4R1
1 1 1 R2 24. A
R1 = R 2 + 2R1 R1 = 2
4
i= = 1 Amp
4
20. D V = E + ir = 2 + 1 × 3 = 5V
2
R
3 25. B
In b V = E + ir
R
R 2
R
3
26. D
R
A From graph I = 0 Open ckt.
B
V=y=E
11R When V = 0 . Imax
Req. =
18 E = ir
y = xr
r = y/x
www.motion.ac.in
114 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
27. D 30. A
E – ir = V
31. A
E
V=E– .r
R r
32. C
at R = 0
E r
V=0 33. C
x 34. C
4V 0.8 i3
R i = 10A
i1 + i2 + i3 = 0
x4 x x4 +
+ + =0
0.8 0 .8 0.8 120V –
x=0
– +
i.e. there is no curent in 0.8 resistor
1
100V
4
i1 = i3 = i = = 5A 20
0.8 = = 10
R 1
V = E – ir = 1 – (5) (0.2) = 0
R = 1
29. C
35. A
a b
R
3V 1 15V 2
R V r
From circuit analysis we get
V
i=
18 Rr
i=
R3
move in the circuit from point b to a
18
Vb = – (1) + 3 + Va
R3
Vb – Va = 0 = – 18 + 3R + 9
3R = 9
R = 3
36. B 40. A
R
v2 dQ
Initially H = i= = 2 – 16t
R dt
v2 11
H= t, & R = P' = 1 P
R A 100
P' increses by 11 %.
AV2
H t
42. D
A V2
H We know that P
R
r2
H (200 )2 RA RB
Then RA =
300
Heat is doubled only when r, doubled
(200 )2
RB =
38. C 600 200 V D.C.
In series
2
Vrated 2
R= R Vrated
Prated
( 200)2
Req = RA + RB, P =
In series I is same. ( 200)2 (200 )2
300 600
2
Power = I2R Vrated
P = 200 Watt
39. C
P=V.i, P = E. . JA
P
= EJ
A
www.motion.ac.in
116 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
x y 46. D
O
i=0
r
E
=1 ...(1)
rxy
12 O
10 volt 12
O From circuit diagram voltmeter reading will
x
be 12V
47. A
r
R1 × 60 = R2 × 40 ....(1)
E.r
E = 10 volt R 2 10
x r
R1 × 50 = R 10 × 50 ....(2)
2
Ex
= 10 volt ...(2)
xr 50R1 10R2 50
Devide (2) by (1) 60R R 10
1 2
E R 2 40
= 1 volt ...(3)
rxy
x = 1 10
R2 = 5 ,R1 =
3
12 1
= 10
1 r
r = 0.2 48. A
6
Potential gradient x =
1
2
6 = 4 = m
3
49. B 52. B
case 1 1
12 × (100 – x) = 18 × x
1200 – 12x = 18x 11 volt
V = 1volt
30x = 1200 R 10
x = 40 cm
A
case 2
12 × (100 – x) = 8 x
1200 – 12x = 8x V
I
r R
x = 60cm
11
I= = 1 Amp,,
50. A 10 1
11 1 1 volt
Potential gradient = x = =
10 m
R
R
A A 53. A
I0 I0
V From V : IR
P
Voltmeter E 3E
Potentiometer (finite Resistance) When S1 is closed V1 = 4R 3R = = 0.75E
4
8 4m
1m 2 Volt
1 Volt 0.5 m
0.5 volt 25 cm
www.motion.ac.in
118 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
1. C 8. C
Given that l1 = 20 cm, R1 = 5 ,
2. C l2 = 40 cm, R2 = ?
Due to random motion During stretching volume of wire is constant
of e , vmean = 0
-
20A 40A' A' A / 2
3. D l
We know that R
A
i = neAVd
V = iR
R 2 l2 A 40 A
R 1 l1 A' 20 A
4. B 2
we no that I = neAvd
R 2 20
I I
Vd 2
neA r
9. C
2 2
y : = 0 (1 + T)
Vd1 I r 4 2
1 2 16 is –ve for semi conductor
Vd2 I2 r1 1 1
z : temp Hence rate of collision
5. B 10. A
in this question n p
B B
A s, e q R1 = (1 + BT)
A
i = neAVd
C C
i R2 = (1 + CT)
= Vd A
sq
Req. = R1 + R2
6. D B B B B
Req. = + BT + C C + C C CT
A A A A
F = –e E Net resistance is independent of temp.
So e – moves randomly but slowly drift
B BB T T
opposite to E. + C C C =0
A A
7. B B CC
Given that l = 15 m, A = 6.0 × 10-7 m2.
C = B B
R = 5 , = ?
RA 5 6 107
0.2 106 m
l 15
11. D 18. D
Apply current density concept
1
A B
I j . dA V
1
1 1
E
x dx D (1 – x) V x C
( 2 x )1 2
x= , x – 4x + 2 = 0
3x
x=2± 2
x
J0 1 for 0 x R /2
R
CE 2 2
I= x R =
J0 R for
2
x R ED 2 1
CE ( 2 2 )( 2 1) 2 2 22 2
R /2 R = =
x x ED ( 2 1)( 2 1) 1
i=
0
J0 1 2xdx +
R
R /2
J0 2xdx
R
CE
= 2
ED
5
i= J0R2
12
19. B
12. D A
13. D x x
y y
14. D
B
16. C 20. B
B i/3 C
17. C
i/6
2i
A D 3
i/3 i=0
i/6 i/3
i/2
G
F
i/3 i/6
i/2
H
i/6 E
www.motion.ac.in
120 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
21. A 24. B
R
5 3 3 L R
2L 2R
2A 1A 1A 0.5
Q' = 2Q
10 10 4 to rai s e T
28V 2R
t em pe rature i n
same time t.
4 2 3 I'2 R't = 2I2 RT
After circuit Analysis we get Req = 14 I'2 (2R) T = 2I2RT
28
I' = I
I= = 2 amp..
14
nE 3E
= n=6
2R R
22. C
In parallel combination equivalent resistance 25. B
Req is less then the minimum value of any of
resistance R1< R
In series Req is greater than maximum of E1 r1 E2 r2
resistance. R2 > R. O
E2 – ir2
23. A
2R 2R R
2R
P r r Q E1 E2
i
R r1 r2
2R 2R
So for E2 – ir2 < 0 (for increasing i)
P r r Q
2R 2R
Req = 2rR/r+R
26. D
x 10 x6 x5
Now + + =0
10 20 30
(E + ir)A B
10 8
n–2 x = 8V, i1 = = 0.2A
10
30. A
Eneq = (n – 4) . E rneq = nr
V = E – ir
From circuit analysis we get
v = -ir + E
V = E + ir ....(1)
V
(n 4)E E (n 4)E .r 2 r
i= ,
nr = 2E 1 n i
nr
10
r r 5
27. B 2
r1 1
31. C In parallel resistance i
R x r2 2 O
E nE
A B 32. A i= =
r /n r
r3 3
33. A
x 1 x 2 x 3 For power maximum
r1 + r2 + r
3
=0
rmax
x = 2 volt P = i 2r
Current through each network is same
r i2r
28. C In first case Req = , P1 =
3 3
In series V = V1 + V2 = 20V
In second case Req = 3r, P2 = i23r
29. B 3r i2 3r
In third case Req = , P3 =
Let potential of junction is x , then current 2 2
shown in circuit
2r i2 2r
6V In forth case Req = , P4 =
3 3
5V
www.motion.ac.in
122 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
34. A 37. A
I2R is maximum for R1 resistance As I > I1 & I2
V2
Situation shown in diagram P =
R 50 I2
Case I Case II I I1
3V 50 20
(200)2 (200)2
R1 R2
60 100
maximum power dissipation in R1.
38. B
P = V.I V I2
200 V
39. B
As Req decreases Inet increases hence current
In series combination
through X increases but as Inet will now be
distributed in Y & Z, current in Y decreases.
200 2 200 2 200 2 160
R eq R 1 R 2
60 100 60 100
40. A
2002 160 i = At B
P 37.5 W
60 100
at t = T, i = 0 R
0 = AT + B
35. A AT = –B
R = (120)2 /60
+ – + – + – T T
40 40 40
P=
(40) 2
× 60 ,
q= dq = (t AT) dt
2 0 0
(120 )
120
= 6.7 Watt
AT 2
q= – BT2
2
36. D
AT 2 2q
q=– A=
R
2 T 2
2i/3
T T 2
i 3R 2qt 2q
2R 2
i/3 0
Heat = i R.dt
0
T2 T Rdt
T 2
V2 4I2R 4q2 t
P1 I2R = 1 .R.dt
R 9 T 2 T
0
P 2 I2 3R
4q2 ( T )3 2( T )2 2
= T 2
R = 4q R
P1 4 2
T 3( T ) 2T 3T
P2 27
41. D 43. B
All resistances are parallel so potential is S2 is open
same
6V
V = 0.3 × 20 = 6V
1 1 1 G
i1 : i1 : i3 = R : :
1 20 15
A B
= 60 : 3R1 : 4R1 L/2 /2
3R1 ()
0.3 = 60 7R × (0.8) O
1
According to diagram
R1 = 60
= 6V = 12V
2
42. C
L 12V
7L
7 volt
12
10
6V r
12 7 Volt
5L/12 G
12 O
For balanced condition 7L/12
R 1 R 3 = R4 R 2 O
12V
(A) No effect of emf of battery
6 – ir = 5
(B) (R1 + 10) (R3 + 10) (R2 +10) (R4 + 10)
Incorrect 6
6– r=5
(C) (5R1) (5R3) = (5R2) (5R4) 10 r
R 1 R 3 = R2 R 4 correct. 6r = 10 + r r = 2
(D) Balanced
44. D
R1 R4 r = ig (R + rg)
G
45. C
R2 R3 V
R=
i i1
4A
i1 < 4A
20 = i1R 4A
i2
20 A
R = i > 5
1 20V
www.motion.ac.in
124 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
46. A
D R
+ –
J
A
B
r
C G
47. A
We can observer that 10, 10 and 20 are
shorted and bypassed, so no current will flow
45V
in then and I = = 0.5 A.
90
+
90
45V 10
A 10
–
20
Alternative :
90 I
+ A
– –
10 –
– 10
20
45V
I 0.5A
90
1. A,D
i = neAVd , R l
i = neAVd dq = neAVd . dt A
V i.R i..dx
E1 = = =
is fixed. dx dx A.dx
i. 1
2. ABCD = constant E1 A
A 1
E1 A 2
R= = = same E2 A1
t t
V = iR = same dx
i same P = i 2R i 2
A
i2R same.
6. A,C
3. A,B,C
Current should be maximum in 2
A B
O 8
E+ir
R
4. A,C,D Should be minimum
1V 2V
A 3 R = 0 (power should be maximum
1 –1 when r = 0)
i3
O Power = 72 watt.
D x
i1 B
7. A,C
2
3 4 i2 V 10V
3V 1V R1 1k
I 10mA
220 V (A) and (C)
Let potention of point B is x then from R2 4.4 k
kirchhoff's first law 50mA
i1+i2+i3 = 0 8. A,D
To ensure maxi mum c urrent through
x x2 x 1
+ + =0 ammeter its resistance should be small.
2 4 3 To e ns ure mi ni mum current throug h
6x 3 x 6 4x 4 voltmeter its resistance must be very large.
=0
12
9. B,C
13x = 2
Given R = 100 , ig =50 A
2
x= volt rg
13 i = ig 1 R
5. A,B,C,D V = ig (r + Rg)
E2 10. A,B
E1
As emf of E1 is distributed over the wire AB.
(1) dr (2) Hence A is correct E2 is balanced by fraction
dx of length of wire E1 > E2.
We only balance potential difference hence
B is correct.
www.motion.ac.in
126 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
1. 1.5625 × 1019 9. 0 I | 1 – 2 |
I
0.5 E2 = 2
i = 2i1 = 0.5 i1 = A
2
i1t 0.5 5
I
So total Cu++ = = 10 = × 1019 E0 + = 1
ze 2e 3.2 2 0 A
I
– E0 + =– 2
2. 1.56×10-2m/s 2 0 A
I
2 = ( – 2)
3. 1.25 × 1017, (b) × 106 A/m2 0 A 1
A = I0 (1 – 2)
i V
e
No. of = =
sec e Re 10. 1127 K
20 2
= = 1017 11. 1
1000 1.6 10 19 1.6
i V 2 A
J = 10 6 Amp/m2
A Rr 2
2
O 1
1 1
4. 25 V/m 1
x x
V = IR = 10 × 5 = 50 Volt
1
2 2
V 50 y 1 y
E= = = 25 V/m
2
Due to folding symmetry circuit is as like
5. R/9 A
2
6. 27:6:1
1 1
1 1
7. 544 D
2 2
8. 84.5°C
1 1 1 1 4
R AD 4 2 4 4
RAD = 1
22
13. 2
35 X b
4V
– +
3 3 5
–
+ 2V
4V 4
i i
8
2 a y
i=
5
2 4
Vx + 3 × + 4 – 3 × = Vy
5 8
6 3
Vx + + 4 – = Vy
5 2
Vx – Vy = 3.7 V
22
RAB = No current in branch ab so there is no change
35
in Vx – Vy.
3r 18. 1
14.
5
FD & EC will be removed due to symmetry 4 R x 4
RAB = 3r/5 2
4V 10
10
15. zero 0 0 0
3 6 10
4.5 3
4.5V
3V
O
www.motion.ac.in
128 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
19. 1V
R2
For imin Rmax . So S1 is open,
R1 r = R 2 r . R1
S2 is open & S3 is open
r= R1R 2
6 3 2A
a
6
1A 1A
1 9 22. 90 watt
1 1
2A
2
24V b 10 E E2
= R = (when in series)
O O O 3 3R 9R
2 1
23. 12A, – 20 W
Req = 3
25 25 25
25
E 6
i = R = = 2A 10V 5V 20V 30V
eq 3 25V
15 30 5V 55
12A
1 1 1 5 10 5 11
i1 : i2 : i3 :: : :
8 4 8 3A 3A 1 5A
1:2:1 O O O
1
i1 = i3 = × i = 0.5 A
4 50 22 11
24. (a) 4.55A (b) 48.4
11 5
2 (c) 1000 W (d) 240 cal s–1
i2 = i = 1A
4
(e) 80/3 gm min-1
P1 = i2 R = 0.25 × 8 = 2W
(a) P = VI
P2 = 4W
1000 = 220 × I
P3 = 16W
(a) 12W (b) 4W (c) 8W 50
I= A = 4.55 A
11
(d) 4 (e) 4W
V2 220 220 22 11
(b) R = = = = 48.4
21. R1 R 2 P 1000 5
(c) P = 1 kWatt
2 2
. R . t = . R . t P 1000 cal 240cal
(d) Joule/sec. = _
~
R1 r R2 r
1 2
4.2 4.2 sec . sec
(B) 10 + ir – V = 0
dm
(e) P = L V = 11 volt
dt
(H) (A) P = – [Vbox I] (B) Vbox I
dm dm 12 = – [9 × 1] = 11 × 1
240 = 540 × = gm / sec
dt dt 27 = – 9 Watt = 11 Watt
27. 4
12 80
× 60 gm/minute = gm / min ute
27 3
i3 5 i4 5
25. 90% 6
4
i2
iR i5
60 = × 100 3 (R + r) = 5R i 1 2
i(R r )
i
3r = 2R
V
i(6R) 6R
now = × 100 = × 100
i(6R r ) 2R
6R 1 1 1
3 i1 : i2 : i3 = : : = 15 : 5 : 6
2 6 5
= 90
15 5 6 4
i1 = × i, i2 = × i, i3 = × i, i4 = × i
26. (a) E = 10 V each 26 26 26 9
(b) (A) act as a source and
5
(B) act as load i5 = check i2R for all
9
(c) VA = 9V, VB = 11 V
(d) PA = 9 W, PB = 11 W
28. 600
(e) Heat rate = 1 W each
(f) 10 watt.
100
(g) 9V, 11 V A
(h) –9W, 11 W
(a) E = 10V in each case R 50
(b) (A) as source (B) as load
+ –
(C) (A) E – ir = 10 –1 = 9V
300 1.5 V
(B) E + ir
= 10 + 1 = 11 volt
When both switches open then
(D) (A) output (B) Output
P = VI P = VI 1.5 1
i= i= Amp..
= 9 × 1 = 9 watt = 11 × 1 450 300
= 11 watt When closed
(E) (A) i R
2
(B) i R
2
= 1 Watt = 1Watt 1
volt A O
3 1/300
(F) EI = 10 × 1 = 10 (in ech case) R
1
volt O
(G) (A) 10 – ir – V = 0 3
V = 10 – 1 1
volt O
3 300 1.5V
= 9 volt
www.motion.ac.in
130 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
x
i4 i3 i2 i1
5 10 2 1 5A
A 10A
10 20 20 r
i1 + i2 + i3 + i4 + 5 = 10
20 10 3
x x x x
+ + + + 5 = 10
1 2 10 5
5 7
60 V
I 0.4
41 7
20V V
4 8
2 10
V
i= R G
eq i 20 i1
10m
O
2volt
20 30
i= 20V G
10 20 480
500 1 1.5 volt
(a) 2V 5
34. 46.67 cm
2
0 10V 10 35
10m
O 30
2
30
35
2V 12 G
5V volt
1 O 7
3V 3
V G
+ – B
2V
1 12 70
A volt 10m, 1 volt m
3 7 12
4V 5
70
1.5 V × 1.5 m = 8.75m
35. 4 ohm 12
10V
10 O
(b)
40 cm
10
O
G
5V
– +
10
5 1 G
5
5 1 6Volt
R 1 R
5
5
5+ × 1 = 6 Volt
1 R
5 = 1 + R R = 4
www.motion.ac.in
132 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
(a) from I = JA vx x
v 0 A e 0 x / L
I R
r
dv
0L e 1 A e dx
v0 0
0 dI 0 J0 1 R 2rdr r dr
v 0 e L x /L
v x v0
L e 1 1
e
x
0
J0R 2
I
3
v0e
v x v0 [e x / L 1]
J0 A (1 e)
I
3
(e x / L 1)
I R vx v0 1
1
J0r (1 e )
(b) dI R .2rdr
0 0
e x / L e 1
v x v0 1
2J0 R3 2
2 2J0 A 1 e
I 3 3 J0R I
R 3
5
4. eff
0L 1 V0 A e 4
3. R 1 ; I ;
A e 0L e 1
1 1 1
R eq R1 R 2
V0 (e x/L e 1)
V
1 e 1
1 1 1
Given = 0 e–x/L
R eq (1 eff ) R (1 t ) 3R (1 2t )
0 e x / L dx
(a) dR 3R
A R eq
4
L
1
R 0 e x / L dx = L 0 [e x / L ]L0
4 1 1
A0 A
3(1 eff t) (1 t) 3(1 2t)
4 1
(1 eff t)1 (1 t)1 (1 2t)1
3 3
V0 0
x (using binomial theorm
dx
4 1
(1 eff t) (1 t) (1 2 t)
3 3
0L 1
R 1
A e
Case - II
4 3 3t 1 2t
(1 eff t)
3 3 r
r r r r
5 r
4 – 4 eff t= 4 – 5 t, eff =
4 r
1 3 1 R2 3
Now Re q
x 5 x R1 5
d 1
0 for (Req )max 8. 7/5 times the length of any side of the square
dx R eq
Given circuit is
Applying KVL : in closed loop ABEFA
A A 2r I1 + I3 r – I2 r = 0
2I1 + I3 – I2 = 0 ...(1)
3 3 Applying KVL in closed loop BCDEB
/3
(I1 – I3) r – ( I2 + I3) 2r – I3 r = 0
/3
D C r
B C 2 r
x 2 x r i1–i3 C
A i1 2r B r r
i3 r
i I
r
r r
1 1 i2 r
0
(5 x)2 ( x)2 F E 2r i2+i3 D r
x=2
I1 – 2 I2 – 4 I3 = 0 ...(2)
3
Now circuit is R eq Solving (1) & (2), we get
11
I2 = – 3 I3 , 4I1 = – 2I3
i = i1 + i2 = – 3.5i3
R2 3
7. i3 1 2
R1 5
i 3.5 7
Case-I
r r r r
R1 = 5r
www.motion.ac.in
134 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
(k 1)2
;
k (k 1) /k V
2
0
9. (i) (ii)
k (k 1) R3
1 V0 V0 V0 1
(i) 1 K R KR KR 1 K
1 2 1
K 1 1 K 1 vb – va = 12 V
R1 R 2 KR1
K 1 1 1
1 (ii)
R1 K R 2
V0 R1 R1 R1
V0/k V0/k2 V0/kn–2 V0/kn–1 V0/kn
V 0/k[1 – 1/k]
V 0/R 1K[1 – 1/k]
V0/KR2 R2 R2 R2 R2 R3
R1 (K 1)2
R2 K
36
Now from again apply KCL i= = 9A
4
R
V0 V0 1 V0 V0
k n 2 K n 1 R k n 1R k nR
1 2 3
I1
11. E = I1R
k2 k k 1
R1 R2 R3 E
R
R2 R
K(K 1) K 2
R1 R3
I2 2E = I2R
R2 K
R3 K 1
E E
V V (K 1) V0 K 1
(ii) i 0 0 2 = R
KR 2 K R3 R3 K 2
I3
10. (i) Vab = –12 V, (ii) 3 amp from b to a E E = I3R
(i) When switch is open
E
36
i 8A
9/2 6E 2 6E 2
36 V Now 3I3I2 = , 2I1 (I2 I3 )
R2 R2
6 3 22
12. Volt
9
KCL at point P, Q, R, S then find out
3 6
4
9x = 4 x=
9
0V
4 15. 11 6 2
vB – 1 – 1 – = vA
9 Let us assume each wire have cross sectional
area is A and square of length then
x+4 1V x+3 1V x+2 1V x+1 1V x R
i2 i1 S D C
P i3 Q R R=
A
V2 R R
PAB
1V 1V 1V 1V 0 R
22
for power in DC
A B
v A – vB = – volt R
9
R 2
v
2 1
v1 V 2 v 12
13. (i) 10.52 ; (ii) 0.3125
R 2 3 2 2 , PDC R
(a) 0.44 = 0.2 V 5/2 2R
2 1
V5/2 = 2.2 ...(1)
6 – V = 0.44 R ...(2)
R
Solving (1) & (2), we get D C
R R
0.2V5/2 R
V
2R
V1
6V
PAB (3 2 2)2
11 6 2
R = 10.52 PDC 2
Prod = 2 Presistance
(VI)rod = 2 (I2R)resistance
16. 7.2 m
(b) 0.2 V5/2 × V = 2 × (0.2 V5/2)2 R
Resistane of potentiometer wire
0.2 V7/2 = 0.08 V5 R
= 11.5 × 10 = 115
1 = 0.4 V3/2 R
6 – V = 0.2 V5/2 R 2
Current in the circuit i = A
6 = V(1.5) 115
1
R= 0.3125 2V
3 .2
400 400 4
x= W , mgh = m = kg/sec. So i (6.9 × 11.5) = V,
9 9 9
2
200 V 6.9 11.5 1.38 V
t= 9 = 450 sec. 115
4
after 5 is also connected then
www.motion.ac.in
136 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
At Balanced l
2 0
condt.
G
i ( × 11.5)
V
= 1.38, = 7.2 m
300
Current sensitivity = = 6 mA/div..
50
E
I Amp.
10 r
100
10 r
90
G
ig rg=r
I
10
10 I 10 E
ig
(10 r ) (10 r ) 10 r
100
10 r
In this situation ig = 9 × 6 = 54 mA
10 E
54 × 10–3 = ...(1)
10 r
(10 r )100
10 r
Similarly
50 E ...(2)
30 6 10 3
50 r
(50 r )100
50 r
1. B 4. C
X Y
The galvanometer shows G
E
zero deflection ie, current I=
R r
through XY is zero R 2V
12V
As a result potential drop E
I= cons tan t
across R is 2V. Circuit can R
be redrawn as
Where, R = external resistance
Y
12 r = internal resistance = 0
I
500 R I
R 2V
Voltage across R, V=IR 12V 5. D
The internal resistance of the cell
12
2 xR
500 R
l1 l2 240 120
or 1000 + 2R = 12R r = l R x 2 2
2 120
or R = 100
6. A
2. B
Req = R1+R2+R R1 R2 V2
p=
A B R
2E
I
R1 R2 R E E V2 200 x 200
R hot 400
P 100
According to the
R
question, 400
R cold 40
- (VA-VB) = E - IR2 10
0 = E - IR2
or E = IR2 7. C
2E V2
or E = R R R R2 Rsistance of electric bulb R = , where
1 2 P
subscripts denote for rated parameters.
or R 1 R 2 R 2R 2
or R = R2-R1 (220)2
R=
100
V2 V2 V2
H1 t and H2 t Pconsumed =
R (R / 2) R
H2 (110)2
2 Pconsumed = 25W
H1 or H2 = 2H1 (220)2 / 100
www.motion.ac.in
138 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
8. B 11. B
Let resistance of bulb filament is R0 at 0 C0
The given circuit can be redrawn as
then from expression
R = R0(1+)
we have, 100 = R0[1+0.005 x 100]
and 200 = R0[1+0.05x]
where x is temperature in 0 C at which I
P R
Q S
I
S1S2 P R(S1 S2 )
here S S1 S2
S1 S2 Q S1S2 + -
1
5 R o 1 50
200
or R0 = 4 .
13. D d. (C)
Let (A, lA, rA, AA) and (B, lB, rB, AB) are specific Choosing A as origin,
resistances, lengths, radii and areas of wires
A and B rspectively. 1
E j
2 r 2
A lA A lA
Resistance of A = RA= A r2
A A (a b)
1 1 l 1 1
VC VB 2
dr
BlB B lB 2 r 2 (a b) a
Resistance of B = RB= A r2
a
B B
A lA B lB 16. (C)
rA2 rB2
A dksew
y fcUnwds: i esapq
uusi j
A lA 2A lB 1
or 2
E j
rA (2rA )2 2 r 2
lB 2 (a b)
or 2 :1 1 1 l 1 1
lA 1 VC VB 2
dr
2 a
r 2 (a b) a
14. B 1 1 1
VB VC
From balanced Wheatstone bridge concept, 2 a (a b)
55 20
or R = 220
R 80
17. (C)
15. C 18. D
Let potential at P1 is 0 V and potential at P2 is
V0. Now apply KCL at P2.
19. D
let R 0 be the initial resistance of both
P1
conductors
At temperture their resistances will be,
5V -2V R1 = R0 (1+1)
5V 2V
P2 and R2 = R0 (1+2)
For series combination,
Rs = R1+R2
Vo 5 Vo 0 Vo (2)
0 Rso (1+s) = Ro (1+1)+Ro (1+2)
2 10 1
Where Rso = Ro +Ro =2Ro
5 2R0(1+s)=2Ro+Ro(1+2)
or Vo
16
1 2
or s
Vo 2
Sox, current through 10 resistor is from
10
for parallel combination,
P2 to P1.
www.motion.ac.in
140 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
23. A
R1R 2
R
R1 R 2 Sl Sl 2
R (V volume)
A V
R 0 (1 1)R o (1 2 )
R Po (1 p) R l
R o (1 1) R o (1 2 ) 2 0.2 %
R l
Where,
R oR o R 24. C
R PO o
Ro R o 2 As the rated power of 25 W is less than 100
W, it implies that 25 W bulb has higher
Ro R 2 (1 1 2 12 2 ) resistance. As in series connection, current
(1 p ) 0
2 R o (2 1 2 ) through both the bulbs is same but heating
in 25 W bulb is more than that of 100W bulb.
as 1 and 2 are small quantities So, 25 W bulb will get fused.
1 2 is negligible
25. A
1 2
or P 2 ( ) From Ohm's law,
1 2
V
R ln R ln V ln i
2 1 2 i
1 1
2 2
R V i
3% 3% 6%
2
As (1 2 ) is negligible R V i
1 2
P 26. B + –
2
120
v1 = 240 = 117.07
246
20. B 120 v
at t = 0 Inductor behaves as open circuit. 120
v2 = 48 = 106.67
so, I = V/R2 at t = 0 54
v = v1 – v2
21. B
= 117.073 – 106.67
Resistance of combination Re = 4R 120 v
= 10.4
R e R 5 x 100
5%
Re R 100 27. B
Statement-I (False)
22. D G
I = Ig 1
Potential gradient of a potentiometer, R
I 0.2 x 4 x 10
7 If R More
K 7 = 0.1 V/m
A 8 x 10 I Less
Statement-II (True)
Addition shunt in parallel decreases the
resistance.
28. A 30. A
1
V2
P= 6V
R P0
(200)2
R1 = 9V
40
Total current x
Q
V V V V
= R × 15 + R × 5 + R × 5 + R × 1 x9 x6 x
1 2 3 4 + + =0
5 3 1
R = V2/P
3x 27 5x 30 15x
=0
40 15 100 5 80 5 1000 15
= + + +
220 220 220 220
3
= 11.3626 A x= A
23
Minimum value is 12 A.
from Q to P
29. B
31. D
i = neAVd
S
V l
= neAV
Vd {R }
R A
i-ig
VA
= neAV
Vd G
i ig
5 G = 100, ig = 1 mA
i = 10
0.1
32. B
For cu, resistance increases linearly
For Si, resistance decreases exponentially
www.motion.ac.in
142 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
1. D x 2
100 rg G
i =100×10–6 1 0.1 i ig 1
R (y + 20)
(80 – y)
= 100.1 mA x > 2
2(100 – y) = xy ...(i)
2. Error Ka sawal hai.
x (80 – y) = 2(y + 20) ...(ii)
x. 1 = R × 2 After solving we get x = 3
x 1 R 2
R= x=
2 1 5. A - 's, q' or 's' alone
B - 'q'
R.d 2 R.d1. 2 C - 'p, q' or 'p' alone
dx = –
1 12 D - 'q, r' or 'r' alone
For error
6. C
dx d 2 d 1
= + For R1
x 2 1
Wheat stone Bridge valid
for minimum error 1 = 2 R1 = 1
for R2 = 0.5 (Wheat stone Bridge valid)
3. A for R3 = 2(from simple circuit annalysis)
R= V2
A R1 R2 Power P =
R
P2 > P1 > P3
R1 =
2(2r )2
7. D
R
R2 = = 1 x
2r 2 4 R.B.
P1 = i2 R1 ...(i) G n.d.
P2 = i R2 = i R1/4
2 2
...(ii)
From (i) and (ii) P1 = 4 P2 If x & null deflection remains same R.B.
should increase.
4. A
2 x 8. A,D
a 6 1.5
Rtotal = 2 + = 3.2 k
6 1.5
y (100 – y)
24 V
(A) I = = 7.5 mA = IR1
3.2k
11. C
RL
IR2 = I = 1.5 mA
RL R 2
V R1
V = G1
IRL = 6mA A
RT
A = G2
(B) VRL = ( IRL ) (RL) = 9V
V R2
2
PR1 IR R1
1 25
(C) P = 2 =
R2 I R
R 2 3
2 12. 4
(D) When R1 & R2 are interchanged ,1
R 2RL 6 ,1
R 2 RL = 7 k
Earlier it was 9V R
PV 2
L
R=
2
A J2 R
R 1/2
L
R= L
Lt t J1
= 2.25 R = 4
L J2
R=
t
13. B
10. D = 52 + 1 = 53
= 48 + 2 = 50
V2
P= & 100 W > 60 W > 40 W
R X 10
V2 V2 V2
> >
R100 R 60 R 40
1 1 1 52 48
R100 > R 60 > R 40
x 530
x= = 10.6 ohm
10 ' 50
www.motion.ac.in
144 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
14. 5
V2
Since P =
R
6v 6v 0v
B
R
A Series : Req = time half
2
1A
R 1
6v 3v 3v 1V Parallel : Req = time times
8 8
vA–6–i–2i+3 = vA
i = –1A 18. 5
vA –vB= 5 V
15. A,B,C,D
By symmetry the 1 resistances don't get
any current so circuit reduces to ig = 0.006 Amp.
6
30 = [4990+ Rg]
1000
4990 + Rg = 5000
Rg = 10
s 0.006 6
10 1.494 1494
60 10
s=
1494 249
12
I1
6 12 = 3A n=5
6 12
19. B
16. A,B,D The connection is in parallel
VA = VB
A A A
V1 = iR1 .....(i) RA = A = 6
A (49 10 4 106 )
V2 = iR3 .....(ii)
(i)/(ii)
2.7 108 50 10 3
= = 3 × 10–5
V1 R 1 45 106
V2 R 3
Fe Fe F 10 7 50 10 3
RFe = A = 6 =
Fe (4 10 ) 4 10 6
17. B,D
25 25
= × 10–7–3+6 = × 10–4
2 2
25
3 105 10 4
R A RFe 2
R= =
R A FFe 25
3 105 10 4
2
24. A,B,C,D
3 105 12.5 10 4
=
3 105 12.5 10 4 0V
20. 1 Amp. + –
(Using two times wheatstone bridge) Key 5V
21. A 5V
at t = 0 25k
+ + –
5 0
V
+
50F
t
A
I I0e RC
0V
j(t) + –
Key 5V
(0, 0) t
22. C,D
As the temperature increases, m decreases.
So frequency of radiation increases with
increase in temperature and resistance
increases. So current decreases and hence
power consumed (P = Vi) decreases (V is
constant given)
V = 5 (1 – e–t/RC)
23. A,C RC = 1
V = Ig (Rg + S) V = 5 (1 – e–ln(2))
if Rg and S is large V V = 2.5 V
Potential difference is zero.
Rg (c) I = I0(e–t/RC)
I Ig 1 RC = 1
s
at t = 1 sec.
if s Rg I = I0/e
Then I (d) at =
I=0
www.motion.ac.in
146 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
2. D 8 8 8 8
Charge / Current flows from higher to lower
potential or Q/C ratio. 8 section Total : 32
3. A
Charge / Current flows from higher to lower
potential or Q/C ratio. 8. B
Solving the circuit using following steps
KQ KQ
VA , VB VA > VB V C x
C
R 2R
AB C C C
4. B 0 0 0
0 A A
Given C = C C/2
d C C
If separation is halved d' = d/2
0 A 2 B
C' = 0A/d' = = 2C C
d A
3C/2
C
5. C
Q1 900C Q2 2500C B
When the two capaci tors are connected A
1 . 5C
together let the common potential is V.
C 2 .5
3400
900 2500 (3 5)V V 425V
8 B
Resultant capacitance of the circuit = 1.6C
6. C 9. C
Ci = 40r 1
Cf = 40R U CV2
2
The volume of the n drops is equal to the bigger 1
drop. = × 4 × 10–6 × (1 × 103)2
2
4 3 4 = 2 Joules.
N r = R3
3 3
R = N1/3r 10. A
Cf = N1/3 40r Initially
1 1
7. D Ui CV2 0.5 106 10 4 0.25 10 2 J
2 2
To form a composite of 1000 V we need 4 When the 0.5 F capacitor is connected to an
capacitance in series. uncharged capacitor let the common potential
is V.
4 capacitance in series means in each branch
11. B 14. A
1 1
Ui = CV2 + 2C × (2V)2 A10V
2 2
When the two capaci tors are connected
together let the common potential is Vf.
CV –CV
O
q q 3CV V
= Vf
3C D
–4CV +4CV B
In final situation
–CV CV
From junction law
–V + 1
Uf = 3C × V2 (V – 10)1 + (V – 20)3 + (V – 25)2 = 0
2 6V = 120
–2CV 2CV
V = 20 Volt
15. B
12. B Let q be the charge on all the capacitor
10V –q +q –q +q –q +q
+ –
+ –
– M
+ –
+ –
–
+ –
– 7V 31V
C = 2µF
– N
– +
– + +q –q +q –q
– + Apply KVL
–
– +
– 4µF +
– q q q q q
20V 31 – – – –7– – =0
Before connection 4 2 4 6 12
Q1 = 2 × 10 = 20, Q2 = 4 × 20 = 80
3 6 3 2 10
1 1 24 = q
Ui = 2(10)2 + 4 (20)2 = 900 J 12
2 2
q = 12 µC
Since connected as shown
q q
After Qnet = – 20 + 80 Now VN + +7+ = VM
Connection =60 6 4
VM – VN = 12 V
60
V= = 10 Volt
24 16. D
1 2V 0 –2V
Uf = 6(10)2 = 300 J
2
2F
Heat generated = –Uf + Ui = 600 J
2F x 2F
Applying junction law
(x – 2)2 + (x – 0)2 + [x – (–2)]2 = 0
x=0
www.motion.ac.in
148 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
6V 4F 19. C
0 12V 2F 1 1
x V1 : V2 = : =2:1
3 6
24V 1F 1
V2 = × 24 = 8
Applying junction law 3
(x – 6)4 + (x – 12)2 + (x – 24)1 = 0 1
72 E= (1) (8)2 = 32µJ
7x = 72 x = volt 2
7
72
So, Va – Vb = 0 – x = – Volt 20. A
7
1 1
V1 : V2 :
C1 C2 = C2:C1
17. (i) B (ii) A
(i) Charge is constant V1 C2 1
V2 C1 4
q
E=
2S0
21. C
q2 For charge in 5F capacitor
So, F = qE = C1 : C2 = 2 : 5
2S0
So, W.D. = F [x2 – x1] q1 C1
2 =
q q2 C2
= (x – x1)
2S0 2
5 18
S q2 =
10
1 1 1 22. D
W= 0SV2 x x Q Q2
2 1 2
Q1
18. A 60V C C/2
–q1 q1
5µF 3µF 3
Q= C × 60 = 90C
–20µC 2
+20µC –q2 q2
Q1 : Q2 = C1 : C2 = 2 : 1
4µF 1
Q2 = × 90 = 30 C
q1 : q2 = 3 : 4 3
30C
3 Potential difference across C = = 30 V
q1 = × 20µC C
7
23. B V V1 V
-Q2 Q2 Q1 -Q1 3Q
7µF 2
3Q d 2d
35µF 2
0
A B
x y
2µF
10µF E1 × 2d = E2 × d
As the resulting circuit is a Wheat stone bridge
1 1 2
hence current in 13F capacitor is zero. Hence E1 = , V1 – V = 2d = d
the circuit now reduces to 0 0 0
21 = 2
2Q1 = Q2
A B Q1 + Q2 = 2Q
3Q1 = 2Q
2Q 4Q
Q1 = and Q2 =
3 3
35 10 45
The resultant capacitance is + =
6 6 6
15 –4Q/3 2Q/3
= F
2 1.5Q 1.5Q
4Q/3 –2Q/3
24. B
Initial charge on third plate = 0
C1C2
For capacitors in series C eq 3Q 2Q 5Q
C1 C2 Final Charge = – =
2 3 6
As C1 = C2 .................. = Cn hence
C 5Q
C eq Charge flown =
6
n
For capacitors in parallel
26. B
C eq C1 C2 C3 .................Cn
E
1 1 1 1 B
C eq 1 ............ A
2 4 8 16
1 2 3 4 5 C
1 4
2F C
1
1 1
2 2 3
C
25. A
Initially 2C C 2 0 A
C eq =
3C 3d
Q 2Q
-Q Q 3Q -3Q 3Q 2 0 A
2 2 2 2 2 Q= × ×E
3Q 3 d
d 2d
2
K
After closing key first and third plate come at
same potential.
www.motion.ac.in
150 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
27. B 29. A
10V Q1max = 3 C × 103 C.
Q2max = 4 C × 103 C.
10V O Qmax for first branch 3 C × 103 C
A
B –20 20 0V
10V 20 –20 3C 103 5C
5
Vmax KV =
C 1 2 2
20 –20 6C
D –20 20 0V Similarly for second branch
10V E
0 Q3max = 7C ×103 C Q4max = 6C × 103C
Total charge on plate C = 40 C
6C 103 20
28. (i) A (ii) B (iii) C (iv) C Vmax2 = 10C =
kV
2 7
21C
Initial (when S is open)
The two branches are in parallel. So in order to
C /2 C/2 find max value of voltage for which no capacitor
+ – + –
breaks down Vmax < Vmax .
1 2
30. B
Finally (When S is closed) 2µF 3µF 5µF
C C
3V 2V 1V
– C O O Max charge 6µC 6µC 5µC
+C
Hence maximum charge that the series can with
31
stand is 5 C. So break down voltage = 5 ×
30
So charge flown = [charge finally – charge 31
initially] = volt
6
= C – C/2
= C/2
31. C
C 2 C
Work done by battery = For metal k =
2 2
Hence from formula.
(iii) Initial energy
oA
1 Q2 1 Q2 Ceq =
d t t /k
Ui
2 C 2 C
0 A
2 C
C 1 1 2 (d t)
2 C4C
1 32. B
Uf C 2
2 0 A
1 2 Initially Ci =
Change = C d
4
(iv) Heat = Work done by battery - (Uf-Ui ) Finally after plate is inserted
1 1 1 oA
= C 2 C 2 C 2 Cf = for metals K = and t = d/2
2 4 4 d t t /k
o A
C' 2C
d /2
33. B 36. B
Electric field between two plates of capacitor is
0 A
C=
given by K t
0
dt
k
0 A 3 0 A
When K = 1 then E = Now =
0 t 2 d
dt
k
then K = K then E =
K 0 t 2d t 2
d = =
When K= then E = 0. From the formula 2 3 d 3
V = E.d.
Now positive plate at x = 0 is at higher potential
and potential drops linearly as E is constant.
But as E is the slope of potential v/s distance 37. A
curve hence inside the dielectric as E decreases Vmax = Emax dmax = 4000
hence slope of v v/s x curve for the interval 4000
d=
x = 3d to x = 4d also decreases. 18 106
0 KAmin
Now, C = dmax
= 7 × 10–2 µf
7 10 2 10 6 4000
A= = 0.63 m2
8.85 10 12 2.8 18 106
V O
38. B
34. A C
Electric field between two plates of capacitor is Initially Ceq =
2
C
given by K So, Q1 = Ceq V = E
0 2
C(KC) KC
When K = 1 then E = Finally Ceq = =
C CK 1K
0
KCE
So, Q2 = C'eq E =
then K = K then E = K 1K
0 So, change flow throw battery = Q2 – Q1
On increasing dielectric constant electric field
K 1
decreases. q = C E
1 K 2
CE(K 1)
K=2 q =
2(1 K)
K=4
0 .2
0.4
39. A
(d,0) (3d,0)
0 A
Charge on capacitor Q = CV = V
d
1 0 A 2
Initial energy = CV2 = V
2 2d
35. C
Q2 C2 V 2 1 CV 2
Final energy = = =
Vi = Ei d = d = 3000 2CK 2CK 2 K
0 So,
work done = [Final energy – Initial energy]
Vf = Efd = d = 1000
1 2 1
= CV 1
= 3 = 30 = 27 × 10–12 C2/Nm2 2 K
0
0 AV 2 1
= K 1
2d
www.motion.ac.in
152 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
40. D 45. C
Initially Finally
E E B
+ – + –
6µf 2µf
100V 0V
1µf
C C C CK i=0
C CK
Cneq = Cneq = A 0V
2 K 1 100V 30
CE CEK
qi = qf = By dividing protential across 6F & 2F
2 K 1
CEK CE 100
qf – qi = qflown = – VA – VB = V6µf = ×2
K 1 2 (6 2)
CE(K 1)
= VA – VB = V6µf = 25V
2(K 1)
Now, VB – VC = V2µf = 100 – 25 = 75 Volt
CE CEK
<
2 K 1
So charge flows from C to B.
46. D
After steady state capacitor acts as an open
41. C circuit.
q
Initially E = = A 47. C
0 0 After steady state capacitor acts as an open
= 200 × 102 V/m circuit.
Q Q t= 12
C= =
V E.d 1A
Q 2A 9 3A
C= ....... (1) 3A
200 102 0.05
15V
In final situation Req = 5
charge remains uncharged
15
Q i= = 3A
C' = ....... (2) 5
V'
From (1) & (2) Hence potential across capacitor is 12 volt.
0 A 0 A
2 V = × 200 × 102 × 0.05
3 10 5 102
V = 3 × 10–2 × 200 × 102 = 600 V 48. (i) A (ii) A
In steady state i1 = 0
2 1
So i2 = i3 = = Amp.
10 20 15
2
So VC = i2 × 10 = Volt = Q/c
V – + O 3
x 2cmy
2
Q= × 6 = 4µC
3
42. B
43. C
44. D
49. D 52. D
To calculate charge on capacitor consider that Initally the capacitor acts a closed circuit
capacitor acts as open circuit when completely 2
charged and calculate drop across it which i= = 2 mA
1000
comes out to be 3V. After steady state capacitor acts as an open
When s is opened i.e. discharging circuit
2
circuit i = = 1 mA
300µC 2000
3A
3V 0 at t = 0, I = 2mA and at t = I = 1mA
3A
9V 6A 1/2
R eqC 53. B
The energy dissipated in the 10 resistor is equal
1
= 100 10 6 103 = 50 10 3 = 50 ms. to initial energy stored is capacitor
2
Q2
3.6 × 10–3 =
2 2 10 6
50. C Q = 120 µC
Steps to calculate time constant.
Replace battery by simple wire to find Req.
Apply formula = ReqC. 54 C
3R 7R
+R= = Req 55. D
4 4
51. B
V -t/RC V -t/RC2
i1 = e 1 , i
2 =
e
R R
1 1
t /R
i1
C1 C2
e
i2
1
= e t /R 2C2
e 2RC2
With increase in time i1/i2 also increases.
www.motion.ac.in
154 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
1. D 7. B
The curve shown is for a function xy = constant
Q = CV 10
30 2
0
A x y B
2. D
k 0 A
C=
d 6
where k = dielectric constant of medium
between the plates As the resulting circuit is a Wheat stone bridge
A = Area, d = distance between the plates hence current in 5F capacitor is zero. Hence
the circuit now reduces to
3. C
1 1
V1 : V2 : C2 : C2
C1 C2
C2
V1 V A B
C2 C1
4. B
2 0 2 0 2 0
C= = +
nb / a n 2R / R 2 2
n R V 30 6
2R The resultant capacitance is + = 9F
V 0 4 4
2 0 6 0
= [1 + 2] = Parallel 8. (i) A (ii) B (iii) C
n 2 n 2
V V V V
5. A
V C2 C3
Maximum charge on first capacitor q1max = 160C C1
0 0 0 0
Maximum charge on second capacitor q2max =1280
C. (i) Q1 = C1V = 2 × 10 = 20µF
As capacitors are connected in series. Hence
maximum charge they can store is 160C. Q2 = C2V = 4 × 10 = 40µF
Q3 = C3V = 6 × 10 = 60µF
6. D
Maximum charge on 1st capacitor = 6×10–3C. (ii)Total charge flown = Q1 + Q2 + Q3 = 120µC
Maximum charge on 2nd capacitor = 8 × 10–3C.
In series the maximum charge they can have is So W.D. = (120 × 10–6) × 10 = 1200 µJ
6 × 10–3C 1
1µF 2µF (iii) Total energy stored = (C1 + C2 + C3)V2
2
–3 –3
6 × 10 C 6 × 10 C 1
Hence maximum voltage = = (2 + 4 + 6) × 10–6 × 102
2
6 10 3 6 10 3
V= + = 9KV = 600 µJ
1 10 6 2 10 6
9. B
Q1 Q2
10V Q0 =
A 0V
2
B
C 10V 10V 1
Initial energy U0 = CV2 = U1 = U2
0 A 8.85 10 0.1m 12 2 2
C= 1×10-9F But U1 + U2 U0
d 0.885 103
1 2
U1 + U2 = CV2
Energy stored = C1 C2 V
2
= 10-9×100 = 10-7 Joule
1 1 13. C
Ceq. V2 = 2CV2 CV –CV
2 2
CV –CV
Q Q Q Q
10. B Q 2
CV+
2
–CV–
2 2
1
V
2 O Q
O C V
A 3 2C
4 O
14. B
1,4 2,3
C CV 2CV
V 0 CV –CV
2 0 A 3CV
Ceq = 2C =
d
2V
11. B
12V 1 2 1 2
O Heat = 6CV2 – C(2V) CV
12
2 2
–q +q
C1 C2
+q –q 15. D
The two capacitance C1 & C2 behave as a series
6V
In series charge will be same arrangment as both the capacitors have equal
q q charge on them
12 – +6– =0 AK1
8 4
C1 = 0
d /2
q = 48 µC
AK2
48 C2 = 0
VC2
d /2
= 6V
8 C1C2
C eq
C1 C2
48
VC1 = 12 V o AK1 o AK 2
4
d/2 d /2 2 A K K
o 1 2
o AK1 o AK 2 d K1 K 2
12. D
d/2 d /2
V C 1 Q0 C2 16. B
V0 Negative W.D. by external agent
Correct statement Q2
C1 and C2 are parallel So, V1 = V2 Energy =
2C
C1 = C2 and V1 = V2 Q1 = Q2
Initial change Q0 = CV
Now, Q1 = CV, Q2 = CV
www.motion.ac.in
156 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
17. B 20. C
Initially C KC
K
o A Q1
C 2.5
d
Q2
=K
The two capacitanes act as a paralllel connection
E
A / 2 K o A / 2 C C
C' o
d d
o A K o A KC
5F C eq
2d 2d K 1
2.5 2.5 E
5 K KCE
2 2 Q2 = CeqV = , Q2' = EC/2
10 K 1
K 1 K 3
2.5 Q'2 EC
= = (K + 1)/2K
Q2 KCE
2
18. B K 1
We can express this arrangement as circuit
C 2C 21. C
2
(1,4) 3 As the potential difference is constant hence
we can say that
Q1 = 60 C = V × C ....(1)
C Now there is already 60 C on the capacitor.
When equivalent capacitance is calculated
More 120 C charge flows from battery. Hence
between 1 & 3 then
net charge on capacitor is
C 2C
2 Q2 = 180 C = V × KC ....(2)
(1,4) 3
Equation (2) / (1) 3 = K
22. C
C
2
2C 5C
C1 =
3
+C=
3 Ui =
1 60 10
6
When equi val ent capacitance cal cul ated 2 2 106
between 2 & 4. = 900 × 10–6 J
C 2C 2
(1,4)
2
3 Uf =
1 180 10
6
C 2 3 2 106
180 180 106
C eq= 5C/3 = = 2700 × 10–6 J
62
2C 5C V = 30 volts
Hence C2 = +C=
3 3 Heat produced = 1800 × 10–6 J
So C1 : C2 equal to 1 : 1.
19. C 23. C
The charge stored in the capacitor before and
after the dielectric is inserted is same so
Qi = CV 24. C
V
Qf = (KC) 25. C
8
Qi = Qf
KCV
Hence CV = 26. B
8
K=8
27. A
28. D 30. A
V0 c = 5F
2
V0
q = cv
q q0 t Rc
e dq q0 RC t
c c q = q0 e t RC i e
dt Rc
v = v0 e t Rc
P =i2 R
v0 t dE = i2 R dt
v0 e 100.1
2
Rq20 2t RC
dE = e dt
1 R2C2
= e-t
2 2t
q20 RC
1 dE Rc e
2
dt
Ln 2 = Lne(–t) = (-t)
2t 50
-q20 R C RC
t = Ln (2) = 0.693sec E= 2 e
RC 2 25
29. B = 4.7 J
V
3
31. A
32. B
Just after switch S is closed capacitor act as
R
conducting wire.
v = v0 e t RC
6
i1 = = 3A
1 t 2
e RC = e–2.2
3 i3 = i2 = 0
After long time capacitor act as open circuit
2.2 2.2 2.2
Ln(3) R
R
I1 = I3 = 0.6 A
Ln(3) 1.09
R = 2.00
33. A
34. A
www.motion.ac.in
158 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
1. BD 3. BCD C
(5–q) + – (–5+q) Q1 = CV1
Q2 = CV2
q q Net charge = const. C
[B correct]
(q–15) – + (15–q) 2CV = C(V1 + V2)
C1V1 C2 V2 (1 3)5 V1 V2
V= = = 2.5V (common V= [C correct]
C1 C 2 4 2
potential) As charge flows energy will certainly be lost.
[D correct]
1 1 2 1 2
H = (C1 + C2)V2 – C1V C 2 V Net charge on the connected plates is equal
2 2 2
sum of initial charges because charge is
1 1 2
conserved.
= (1 + 3) (2.5)2 – (1 3)(5)
2 2
4. ABC
1
= × 4 [6.25 – 25] 1.5µf
2 q -q q
= 2 × 18.75 = 37.5 {W.D. by battery = 0} (300+q) - +
V1 q
+ - -(360+q)
150V V
2. ABCD q– 2 + 120V
–2µf V3
Initially –(300+q) 360+q
Q -Q q
0 A V1 + V2 + V3 = 0
C 0 Q -Q 0
d Q1 Q2 Q3
+ + =0
C1 C2 C3
Q
V
C 300 q q 360 q
d + + =0
2 1.5 3
Qd
0 A 900 3q 4q 720 2q
Finally 0
Q +Q –Q 6
C1 C2
9q = –1620
q = –180
Q/2 Q/2 –Q/2 3Q/2 Q1 = 120C
–3Q/2 Q/2 Q2 = 180C
Flow of charge from right to left through A
V1 V2
A C B 5. ABCD
2 0 A
C1 C2 kQ kQ
A (a) Vi = V0 =
Qd 3R 3R
V1 (b) Earthing means V = 0
2.2 0 A
3Q d kq' kq
V2 (c) 0 q' = –q/3
2.2 0 A R 3R
d (d) energy between the spheres increases.
V V1 V2
0 A
Vf Vi
9. ABCD
(A) As from figure VA = 20V (B) In XWY charge increases
(B) 4(VA – VB) + 2(VD – VB)
www.motion.ac.in
160 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
19. ABCD
F R1= 2 E D
R3= 1
R2= 2
In XYW = 10V
CV –CV
A B C
Just afterclosing switch DC will act as wire
Q = const. i = 10 A
After t = DC will be open circuit
CV
t = 1 i
Q2
(C) = 5V
2C Qmax=5 × 0.1
5V 1V
10V
k 2 C2 V 2 1
= = KCV2 i = 10
2KC 2
20. BD
CV –CV
Q2 C2 V 2 1 CV 2
= = = 1 2 3
2C 2KC 2 K
100 60
i1
Now insert dielectric
120 0
–CV
i2
CV
80 60
22. D
R2C2 > R1C2
5. 60 c, A to B
8
1. F
3 24µC
1 120 120
1
A C B Qf =120
x 1 y 60V 144µC
60µC 2µC
60 60
2
36µC
60V Qf =180 144µC
Ceq in ACB = 2/3 F
Ceq between x & y = 2/3 + 2 = 8/3 F
O O
2. 3Q/2C 6. 150 J
–3Q/2
V = 3Q\2C 4µF
After closing switch only change in charge is at
3µF
3. 0.05 Nt 1
× 3 × 102 = 150 µJ
Force between the plates is given by 2
2 A
or 7. 10 C
2 0 10 10
0
E 1 106 105
F= q
2 2
E 10
[ as electric field is due to charges on a
2
0.1
single plate is to be written] N 0.05Nt
2 10 0
10µC
4. (a) 20 C, (b) 0.3 mJ, (c) 0.6 mJ. (d) 60 C
2C
Ci = Cf = C
3 Q = CV = 1 F × 10 V = 10 C
2CV CV
Qi = Qf = CV [flown = = 20µC]
3 3
1 2 1 2C 2
Heat = 30 × 20 – CV V
2 2 3
CV 2
= 30 × 20 – 6 = (600 – 300) µJ
(d) 40 due to discharging (220 due to extra
charge flown)
www.motion.ac.in
162 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
100 32
8. (a) volts ; (b) 28.56 C, 42.84 C, 11. F
7 23
71.4 C, 22.88 C
C
A
60
8/3 8/9
10
3
x B
2 (x–20) 4
C 32/9
5 50
A
B
2x + 3x + 5x + 4(x – 20) = 120
39
14x = 200 C 32
9 =1C=
100 32 23
C
x= Volt 9
7
9. 30 V A 0 V 2 A 0 V
12. , –
d d
O O
3C CV
b O CV CV CV O –
a V
–CV –CV –CV –CV +
C V V
V
P q
1 1
V1 : V2 = : 1 q2 d
3C C 13.
V1 : V2 = 1 : 3 2 0 A
1
V1 = V' V' = 8V 2Q 2Q
4 q –q
4 1 8 4
V3 : V4 = : V =
15C C 4 15
V4 = 30V
q2
Energy =
10. C 2C
1 1 1 1
C C 2C 4C ......
eq
14. 9J
1 Energy in the capacitor is Released as
= 1
C 1 .... 1 (20 10 6 )2
2 heat = × (0.1)
2 4 0 (0.2 0.1)
1 1 C
C eq = 1
Ceq =
2 9 109 4 10 10
C1 = = 9 Joule
2 6.4
C/2
15. yes
0 A 0 A C
C/2 Ci = = C, Cf = =
Ceq = C d 2d 2
During pulling charge remains same.
C 3C
0A sec(y / 2d)
dc =
dy
All the elements are in series
d
1 dy y
2C 4C Hence C n =
eq
0 0 A cos
2d
0 A
Let =C {Area = A/2}
2d
d
2d y
3C 2
(2C)(4C) = sin
Ceq = + 0 A 2d 0
C 3C 2C 4C
3 4 25 0 A 0 A
= C+ C= Ceq =
4 3 24 d 2d
17. Proof
21. 800 volt
+q –q
Charge on 15 F capacitor A = 1500 C.
d Charge on capacitor B = 100 C.
i
When they are connected with dielectric
removed from A the capacitor.
d Capacitance of A now becomes 1 F.
R
A
0 A.15
qAd q Ci = = 15C = 15µF,, 1500 + – –1500
q/C d
i= = d Ak = K
R 0 0 0 A
Cf = C = 1µF
d
Q remains constant
18. Yes,Yes 100V + –
Qnet = Ceq × Vcommon 1µF
dielectric slab
1500 + 100 = 2V
V = 800 Volt
22. C is increases
www.motion.ac.in
164 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
23. R1 is smallest
q20
V = RI = k× 10-1
2C
1
I 4 10 3 4 10 3
R
= K × 10–1
2 40 10 6
Q 1
k=2
t R
from graph, it is clear that R1 is smallest.
29. 2
q = q0 (1-e-t/RC)
24. 0.2 A, 20 c
dq
V 10 i=
I= = 0.2A dt
R 50
Q = CV q0 -t/RC
i= e
RC
Q = (2F) × 10
Q = 20C q02 -2t/RC
i2 = e
R 2C2
q02 -2t/RC
25. = 3 RC P = i 2R = e
RC2
Req = 3R
q02 = RC2 × 360
= 3RC
q0 = 3600 C2
q0 = 60×C
26.
2
105
i RC
C = 2×10-6
q0 = 60×2×10-6 C
K=2
L
30. 0
27. 10 70 = 7 × Vf
Q = Q0 e-t/RC Vf = 10V
63 5 103 1 2 1 (50)2 1
2
q0 e Heat = 2 2 (20) 2 5 2 7 (10) = 0
100 RC
t
63
= e 2Rc
100
5 103 t
t 10 m sec.
RC 2RC
28. 2
q = cv = 40×10-6×100 = 4 × 10–3 C
q = q0 (1 et /RC )
1 q2
E=
2 c
1 2t
E= 2 = k ×10-1 (1-e-125f)
2C q0(1 e )
RC
3 3 I
A C
I I
G H
I 2µF 2µF I
I
F +q – E +q – D
1 2
2
I + 1 + 2
q
10V – – 3
1µF
M
I L K I J
q2
Energy stored in capacitors, U =
2C
q12 q 22 q 32
= + +
2 ( 2 10 6 ) 2 ( 2 10 6 ) 2 (1 10 6 )
= 80.5 × 10–6 J Ans.
Rate of supply of energy by battery is P = EI
= 10 × 1 watt = 10 W Ans.
www.motion.ac.in
166 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
1. Proof q q C Vq q
For Ist contact 1 V
C3 C2 C1 C1
Qq q
C1 C2 1 1 1 V
q V q
Q qmax C
1 C 2 C 3 1 1 1
Potential of plate V0
C1 C2 C1 C 2 C 3
C2 Qq
qmax Q. 4. Proof
C1 Q q
2 k
(i) Eb . (E will be maximum at the surface
a
5 0 A of inner cylinder)
2. (i) ;
3 d b b
Vab 2 k n a Eb n
a a
4 0 AV 2 0 AV
(ii) Q3 = 3 d , Q5 = 3 d for V max
dV b
Equivalent circuit 0 a
da e
1 2 V 5 4
+ – + –
C dx
V0 2 – O
3 +
3 4 m
+ –
x
V0
2C C
5 4
2 k
(ii) Eb
a
C 5C dv 2x dx 1
3 3 b b 2
1 aEb
E 0 E 2 dv 0 2x dx
V0 V V0 V V 2 2 x
a a
2V0 3V
C C C 2 0 a 2 E b2 b
n
2 2 a
V V0
3 dE b
q3 C( V0 V ) ( V0 – 0) C 0 a
da 2
2 4
C (2V0 V ) C 2V0 V0 CV0
3 3
2
q5 C V CV0
3
C12V(C2 C3 ) C1C2C3V
3. q1= q =q3 C1C2 C2C3 C3C1
C1C2 C2C3 C1C3 2
–q
C2 +q
–C1V –
C1
+
+C1V C1V – q –q
C3 +q
Final
Initial
394-Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota
Capacitance - 167
5. 69 C
2q q1 2 q3
0
x x x x 5r r 7r
10V
3 F 14 q 35 q1 10 q3 0 ...(1)
3 F
(y – 5) 6 F
5V
3 F
y –5 r3 q3
O 5V q
q1
r2
6 F 6 F r1
10 O O
10V
(x y 5) 3 (x y) 3 (x 10)3 (x 5)6 0
k q1 k q k q3
5x 2y 5 0
r3 r3 r3
...(1)
( y 5 x ) 3 ( y x ) 3 ( y 10) 6 0 q1 q q3 0
4 y 2x 25 4
q1 q
...(2) 25 – 21
q q q1
25
from eq. (1) & (2) 1
10x – 2x = – 10 + 25 (3.5r 2.5r)
CII 40 21
q
8x = 15 x = 15/8, and 3.5r 2.5r 3.5r 25
2.5r
4 y 15 / 4 25
35 r
115
y 4k
16
After Connection (q1 q)2 2k(q1 q)2
x x x x
UII
2C 35r
3 r 2.5 r 5r
3 F 10V C I 4 0
6 F
–5 (x –10)
2.5 r r 3k
5
3 F
q12 3 k q12
UI
O –5 2C 10 r
O O 5V
6 F 6 F
400
7. – C
10 O O 7
10V Equivalent Circuit :
5F 5F 5F
x 5 3 3 x ( x 10) 3 ( x 5) 6 0
5x = – 5
x = – 1 volt
Now you can calculate charge flown with the help of 20V
x and y
3kq12 5
4q Ceq
6. UI = where q 1 = – ; U II = 3
10 r 25
Charge distribution
2K(q q1)2 / 35 r
k q kq1 k q3
0
r2 r1 r3
www.motion.ac.in
168 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
– + – + – +
V1 75
E1 15000 V / m
100/3 C 100/3 C 100/3 C
d 0.5 10 2
V 225
E2 2 45000 V / m
d 0.5 10 2
20V
Q
1 2
A
5
0 (12)
× 300 = 9000 0 8 10 7 c / m 2
5 8 0.5 10 2
5
5 5
1 1
9. W= C0 V02 1 –
2 K
1 (CV )2 1 1
WE CV 2 CV 2 1
2 2 KC 2 K
20V
25
C eq 10. 12 volt
7 Q = CV0
Charge distribution : q
Qq q
V [V is the final voltage]
C CV
– + – + – +
– + + – (Q q) V q (CV0 CV 2 ) V CV2
200 200 100 100 500
7 7 7 7 7
V V0 V 3 V 2 V 2 V V0 0
1 1 4 V0 1 25
V = 12 V
2 2
20V
400
q C
7 3 1 1
11. (i) CV 2 ; (ii) – CV 2 (K – 1) ; (K + 2)
2 2 6
8. (i) 1.5 × 104 V/m, 4.5 × 104 V/m, (ii) 75 V, (K – 1) CV2 ;
1
300V CV 2 K 1
Q Ceff V0 2
kp 2C
C eff V0 2
V1 V0 300 75 V (K–1).CV
C1 k g kp 8
1
C V 6 CV 2 K 1 W.D.
V2 eff 0 300 225 V 2
C2 8 Slowly means. Heat loss is zero
1 2
Initial (2C KC).V
2
KC d
KCV
tan / 4 tan / 4
0 sk 1
1 2d
Ceq 0 sk 1
1
CV 2 (K 2)
2
1 CV
13. q = CE 1 e + 2
2CV e
t
(R1 R 2 )C
q CE 1 e
t1
2C CV (R1 R 2 )C
CE 1 e
1 3C(K 2)2 V 2 C e
Final energy (K 2)2 V 2
2 32 6 V
t1 (R1 R 2 ) C n 1
K 2 (K 2)2 E
W.D. = CV 2
2
e
6 ( t t1 )
1 2 q CE 1 e (R1 R2 ) C
CV (K 2)(K 1)
2
0SK1 Putting t 2 R 1C R 2 C R1 C (R 1 R 2 ) C , we
12. C get
2d
All the capacitor having capacitance dC are in series.
1 n 1
V
E e
1 dx q CE 1 e
dC
0 sk1 1 sin .x
d V
1 1 dx 1 E
dC 0 sk1
CE 1
e
e 1 CV
CE 1 e 2 Ans.
1 cos .x e
2 d
0 . s .k 1[1 sin x [
d
dc
dx
dx CV 1 – t / RC
14. q 1 – e
x 2 2
1 dx i R ( i i1 ) R V
0 sk 1 2 x
2 iR i1 R V ...(i)
2 cos
4 2a
1 q
sec 2
x . dx (i i1 ) R ...(ii)
2 0 sk 1 4 2d 2C
d
d
tan x
0 sk 1 4 2d 0
www.motion.ac.in
170 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
i R
i1 q I1R
i – i1 or – + I1 R = 0
CV C 2R
2
V R q 2C
CV q I1R 2I1R
2 or – + R=0
C 2R
from (1) & (2)
q I1R
or – + =0
q C 2
2 i1 R i1 R V
2 C q IR 1
q or – =
dq dt 2 C 2
q
i1 R V
CV q RC
CV dq
C But I1 =
2 dt
1 t
q CV 1 e RC q R dq
2 – =
2 C 2 dt
t 2 RC dq
q CV 1 RC or C – 2q =
q 1 e 2 dt
2 2 2
q dq t dt
15. R
or 0 C 2q
= 0 RC
In an R – C decay circuit After integrating, we get
E – t /RC E t
I= ln I = ln – C
e R RC q= (1 – e–2t/RC)
R 2
When value of R is halved then slope
become more negative & the intercept q
or = (1 – e–2t/RC)
increases. Hence R option represents the C 2
variation of logeI with time.
V = (1 – e–2t/RC)
2
G R I F E R i1–i2 D R i1
Writing the potential drop equations for vari- Rewriting the above equation,
ous loops in the circuit,
CE 7 RC dq 2
E = q2 +
6 6 dt
Loop EABCE: = 2(i – i1) + (i – i1 + i2)
R
dq 2
E CE 6dt
= 3i – 3i1 + i2 ….. (1) or q 2 = 7 RC
R 6
E Integrating both sides,
Loop EADCE: = i1 + (i1 – i2)
R dq
E CE 2q =
6dt
7RC
= 2i1 – i2 ….. (2) 6
2
R
q2 EC 6dt
Loop EADBCE: E = i1R + (i – i1 + i2) R + ln q 2 =– + K (integration constant)
C 6 7 RC
E q2 Apply the boundary condition to find K. At
= i + i2 + ….. (3) time t = 0, q2 = 0.
R RC
CE
1 E K = – ln
From 2, i1 = i 2 ….. (4) 6
2 R
Therefore, the time varying charge
Substituting (4) in (1) to find i in terms of i2, equation is:
1 5E 6t
i= i2 ….. (5) CE
6 R q2 =
6 1(e 7 RC )
Substituting (5) in (3), The maximum charge that can be stored by
E q 2 5E 7i 2 the capacitor = CE/6.
= + + Time constant = 7RC/6.
R RC 6R 6
But the current flowing through the
dq 2
capacitor (i2) = .
dt
www.motion.ac.in
172 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
2d/3 d/3
1. A 5. C
Each plate is taking part in the formation of C1C2
C
two capacitors except the plates at the ends. C1 C2 ...(i)
Where
K2 K1
K A
A C1 1 0 ...(ii)
d/3
K2 0 A
and C2 ...(iii)
2d / 3
B o A
It is given that, 9pF
d
These capacitors are in parallel and n plates On substituting Eqs. (ii) and (iii) in Eq (i), we
fron (n-1) capacitors. get the result Ceq = 40.5 pF
Thus, equivalent capacitance between A and B
= (n-1) C 6. C
1 q2 1 q2
U (qo e t / )2 0 e 2t /
2 C 2C 2C
2. D
(Where = CR)
1
E CV 2 ....(1) U Uie2t /
2
1 2 /
The energy stored in capacitor is lost in form of Ui Uie t1
2
heat energy.
1
H = ms T ....(2) e 2t1 / t1 ln2
2 2
From Eqs (i) and (ii), We have
1
Now q qo e t / , qo qoe t2 /
1 2 2mST 4
msT = 2 CV or V
C t2 ln 4 2 ln 2
t1 1
t2 4
3. D
On introduction and removal and again on in- 7. B
Neon bulb is filled with gas, so its resistance is
troduction, the capacity and potential remain
infinite, hence no current flows through it.
same. so, net work done by the system in this B
process
R
W=Uf-Ui
C
1 1
Cv2 CV2 0
2 2
( )
E S
4. D Now, Vc E(1 e t / RC )
Ratio of energy stored in the capacitor and the
120 200 (1 e t / RC )
work done by the battery
1 2
qV e t / RC t RC ln2.5
1 5
2
qV 2 t t
R 2.7 x 106
C ln2.5 2.303 C log 2.5
8. D 11. C
q = q0(1-e-t/RC) Q
CV = 2CV (1-e-10/RC) A
10 CV
RC =
1n2 A
Now, q = q0 e-t/RC
kA Ed
0 .
CV CV t / RC d A
e
4 2
= 0 KE
1 = 8.85×10-12×2.2×3×104
e t /RC
2 = 6×10-7 C/m2
t
In2 = In2
10
t = 10 sec. 12. D
Charge
9. B
In one time constant Q2
Voltage becomes 0.37 times maximum voltage
V = 0.37 × 25 = 9.25
So time is between 100 sec to 150 sec. C
1mf 3mp
10. D
Q1 = 120 C1 (i)
Q2 = 200 C2 (ii)
Now, (1) = (2)
Q1 = Q2
120 c1 = 200 c2
3 c 1 = 5 c2
www.motion.ac.in
174 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
CV R1R 2
Qmax = R R × R2, Req = R R
1 2 1 2
R1R 2 2
For fig. 3 R eq
2. B R1 R 2 3
4V = 12 V= 3 volt 2
Ceq = C1+ C2 = 6 6 4
and 3V = 9 volt 3
q = 36C
q = CV (1 – e–t/RC) 4. C
36 C = 4f × 12 (1 – e–t/) When S open
V1 V2
q1 q2
3V V
3f 6f
9 0
= 4 × 2.5 = 10
3 0
= (1 – e–t/10)
4 q1 = 18f q2 = 18f
1 t 1 1
e–t/10 = – = – ln 22 ;
t = 13.86 sec. V1 : V2 = :
4 10 3 6
V1 : V2 = 2 : 1
3 D 2
V1 = × 9 = 6 volt ; V2 = 3 volt
3
9f 6V 36f
9f
9 27f 0
3 6
6
0
R1R 2 2 When S closed
For fig. 1 R eq
R1 R 2 3
5. A
C1C2 4 4 2 8
Ceq Þ
C1 C2 3 3 3 9 d 2d
1 – Vt Vt 1
6f = 3 + 3 =
C eqn 2 0 A
2 0 A 0 A
d 4d
– Vt 2Vt
3 3
3
1 1 5d 8. C
C eqn = 2 A 3 vt
0
6 0 A 6 0 AR V x 0
Ceqn = =
(5d 3Vt ) (5d 3Vt )
6. 2 sec
1m 4 F 3 2 4 20
Ceq = 3 2 4 9
A B
Q Q0 (1 e t / RC ) 80
v = q/c = 9 = 36 Volt
20
16 Q = 40 Q (1 – e t / 4 )
t = 2 sec Apply charge conservation
(x – 36)4 + 3 x + 2 x = 0
x = 16.
7. D
When connected to 1 Q2 = C2V2 =3 × 16 = 48 C
1 9. BD
Energy stored 2 10 6 v 2 v2 J
2 Hint.
+ 2CV0 0
+ V'
V –
–
2CV0 =2CV’
V’ = V0
When connected to 2 Final situation
+ + CV0 –CV0
V CV0
– – –CV0
C1 C2
1 V2 1 v 2 v2
2 + ×8× =
2 25 2 25 5
v2 v 2 / 5
Energy dissipated = 100
v2
4v 2 q = C0 V
= 100 = 80 %
5v2 q C0
www.motion.ac.in
176 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
q1 k
q2 = 2
E1
E2 = 1
k 2 (K 2)
C= C0 + C0 = C0
3 3 3
C (K 2) 4 7
= 1 =
C1 K 3 3
7C
11. C,D C2
3
13. B
14. C
A
–V0 e=0
–
V0
I = I0 cos t +
I0 1 1 +V0
V0 = = =
c 50.0 20 10 6 10 10 3
1 Balls placed on +ve plate become positive
= = 100 charge and move upward due to electric field.
10 2
These balls on colliding with negative plate
V = 100 cos (t – /2)
become negati vel y charged and move
V = 100 sin t opposite to the direction of electric field.
q0 = CV = 20 × 10–6 × 100
15. D
7
= 2 × 10–3 sin × qv
6 F qE
d
7
= 2 × 10–3 sin qv
6 ma
d
= 2 × 10–3 sin qv
6 a
= –10 C
–3 md
1 2
12. D d at
2
1 qv 2
d t
2 md
1
t2
qv
qv
1
t2
A v2
C1 0 C
d 1
t
v
q
i
t
i 0 v2
7. B
4. C
At point P
P
LM
0i 1 1 OP i i
.P
(2,3)
N
2 x r x Q
x
r
8. B
The field due to arc at the centre is given by
0 I 0 I 0I 0i
Bnet =
bg
2 2 –
bg
2 3 , Bnet = 12
B=
4r
Bnet =
0i1 i 2
+ 0 2
b
g
5. C 4r 4 r
4I
x i2
I
x 2d-x i i
M.F. will add i1
In b/w wire
Bnet = VA – VB = i1 R1 = i2R2
0i 4 0i
B=
2x 2 2 d x b g or
R1 L1
i2 = i1 R = i1 L
2 2
www.motion.ac.in
178 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
11. B
i
i2 = 1 [L = r]
2
0 i1 0 i a
Bnet = + =0
4r 4r a
30°
i.e. the field at the centre of the coil is zero 30°
and is independent of
9. C
Due to first square
FG
0i 2 sin 30 IJ FG 1 1 1 IJ
B1
0I
a
1
2
1
4
2
=
H
4 cos 30 K H a 2 a 3a K
4
2
0i 0i
= ln22 = ln4
i 8 4 3a 4 a 3
B1 0
a 2
4
2
12. A
Due to second square
R/ 2
0i 8
B2 B=0
4 (a ) 2
45°
= 45°
So net B B1 B 2 B3 .... 2
1= 90°
d=R
2
0i 8 2 1 2 1
......
4 2 a a 3a 2a
13. A
10. D
i i i
Add Add
× × ×
i i
14. D 19. A
B = ni
3.14 × 10–2 = 4 × 10–7 × n × 10
n = 2500 turns/ m. m0 5 2 × 100 = B Bnet
2
2×5
15. B
× × × × B1 = m0 5 × 100
× × × ×
2×2×5
+
× × × ×
× × × ×
– 0 100 1
× × × × Bnet = 2
2 2
Eind = v B .dl
5
= 4 10 5 T
2 5
16. B
Behaves as solenoid
B = ni 20. B
B =
4
3
17. A
2
Magnetic field inside a
y 5
1
0 ir 6
cylinder =
4R 2 z x a
R i
r= B = 0
2 4R ×××
×× ××× ×× B due to (a), (1), (3), (5) is zero
Top view –z ×× ××× ××
××× ××× ×××
××× ××× ××× 0i i
i × × ×r/2
×× ××× B due to 2 = k , B due to 4 = 0 k
B 0 i k
4R
e j x × × ××× ××
×× ××× ××
× ××× ×
8R 16 R
0i 0i LMFG 1 1 IJ k 1 jOP
18. A
B due to 6 =
4 R
j , Bnet =
4R NH 2 4 K Q
F 1
E= 00 =
q C2 21. B
Top view
F ×
B= ×
il 0i ×
B=
2 x ×
Hence the dimensions ×
due to this ×
B ×
L2 ×
are L2 T 2 T 2 =M0L0T0 0i ×
Bout =
2 r
Dimensionless. Bin = 0
www.motion.ac.in
180 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
22. B O 26. C
Figure shows infinitely, long, Magnetic field due to Arc i
straight, thi n-wal led pi pe
carrying current I. Let P be B1 =
0i
4R
b2 2 g
any point at a P
2
distance r from the axis OO1
of the pipe. Let B be magnetic B1 =
0i
2 R
b g
field at P. Consider a closed
Magnetic field due to straight wire
circular path O1
passi ng through poi nt P as shown i n 0i
B2 = 2 sin
figure. From Ampere’s Circuital Theorem, 4R cos
B.dl i0
0i
B2 = tan
i = current enclosed by the closed path. 2 R
Obviously, i = 0 Bnet = B1 + B2
2rB = 0 or B = 0
0i
Bnet = tan
2 R
23. C
If we c onst ruct a b i g s quare whos e
27. A
centre is on the wire and side is 2a, with
PQR as quarter of its part, then B.dr over 2
for each arc
8 4
this bigger square is 0I.
1 1 40i 1 1 3 0 i
=
So B.dr over PQR = ( I), as PQR is th
4 0 4 4 r 2r 4 8r
of bigger square.
28. C
24. C
0 ir
q(v r) 0e 2r n r 0ne up to R1 B= (st. line)
2R12
B= 0 = =
4 r3 4r3 2r
25. C 0 ir
from R1 R2 B = (hyperbola)
2 r
R
/2
e
0 i r 2 R32 j
2 r e R j
R2 R3 B = 2
/2 3 R22
R R3 B = 0
0i
B due to arc = . 29. A
4R
0i
B due to wire = .2 sin / 2
4Rcos / 2
0i
= 2 tan / 2 Bwire > Barce
4R
30. A
v is not parallel to B
mv Path of the proton is helical
R=
qB
mv
radius = = 0.1 m
1 qB
q × 12 × 103 = m (106)2
2 2m
T= = 2 × 10–7
m qB
= 24 × 10–9
q
35. B
24 10 –9 10 6 KEH = KEHe = KEO2
R= = 12 cm
0.2
2K
velocity of a particle =
m
31. B
m mv 2Km
R R= =
q qB qB
mP me 4mP M
R P : Re : R = : : . As K & B are constant R
q q 2q q
mv 1 4 16
RH : RHe : R0 = : :
R= 1 1 2
qB
RHe : R O2 = 1 : 1
-particle has maximum R, so the path
followed is B.
36. B
32. C
Path of particle will be helical
/s
1 sin 30° 1m
Helical
v 30°
1 cos 30°
B
Pitch = V||. T
33. B
2m 3
= V cos . = 2 = 3
mv qB 2
R= R v
qB
37. A
34. C
0i1i2
From =F
2d
B = 0.104 T
when current in same direction there is
V
attraction force.
V|| = 3 v
2
60° i1 i2
0 F
V = v F’ = 22 =
2 2d 4
www.motion.ac.in
182 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
38. C
R=p M1 M2 9
qB From (1) & (2) M M =
2Rsin = y2 x 2 1 2 25
M1 17
2 R. x which gives =
= 2
y x 2 M2 8
y2 x 2 2 x
y
2 +
x
2P y x 2 2 41. A
=
qB x y
Angle b/w B & A is zero
qB y 2 FG IJ so = 0
P= 2 x
x
H K
42. A
39. B = I
Torque on a current carrying loop is given by
mR 2
BiR2 =
MB 2
Hence does not depend on shape of loop.
2Bi
=
m
40. B
The formula for time period of a system of 2 10 4
= = 40 rad/s2
2
I
magnets is given by T = 2
MBH
43. B mg sin
Where I is moment of inertia M is magnetic mgsin = f f
moment & BH is Horizontal component of
f.R = i R2Bsin
magnetic field. mg
mgsin . R = i R2B sin M
Now in the sum
posi ti on i .e . mg
when like poles N S B=
iR
N S
are together
44. B
I1 I2
T = 2 M M B = 3 .... (1)
1 2 H
×
In difference position i.e. when opposite poles
are together
N S B
S N
I1 I2
Then T= The force on upper segment is in direction
M1 M2 BH inside the plane of paper while on the lower
= 5 sec .... (2) segment it is perpendicular to plane of paper
coming outwards.
[As 12 osci ll ati on i n 60 sec means 1
oscillation in 5 sec.]
394-Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota
Magnetism - 183
When we calculate r F the direction of 48. A
torq ue are as show n. T he v erti cal On observing the hyteresis curve we observe
components cancel out leaving horizontal that for steel even after removing external
components in left direction. magnetic field the material remains magnetised
for a long time.
45. B
49. A
= 2n (2L) (2a) B sin30°
On increasing the magnetising field more
= 8 Ban I cos60°
domains are aligned in a ferromagnetic
material and hence its permeability also
46. A increases.
1
B
r3 50. B × ×
×
Top view ×
3
B1 3x 27 ×
i ×
B2 x 1 B= 0 B ×
2 x ×
×
due to this
47. D mV
0i
in time dt Bout =
2 r
q Bin = 0
i=
dt
v= 2gh
m . 2 gh = F.dt
q
m . 2 gh = ilBdt = lBdt
dt
m 2gh
q=
Bl
www.motion.ac.in
184 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
1. A
When resistance on both side are different.
So current is different and hence magnetic
field produced by both the segments is not 10 m
equal. Hence net magnetic field at centre is
nonzero.
60°
2. A
3. C
d × d
6. D
0 i1 i2 i1 i2
Bnet
2d r B
= 10 T .....(1) a
90
0 i1 i2 90
B
2d r B
= 30 T .....(1) x
from (1) & (2)
i1 i2 Bnet = 2B sin
i1
2 2 0 ia 0 ia
i2
2r. r r 2
4. B
= 0, = 45°
7. C
0i FG
1 IJ l
B = 4 0
H
2
,
K 45°
l i
net (zero)
2 0i i1
B=
8
i2
5. C
Replace coil by magnet
8. C x axis gives
In (C) there is magnetic field at centre due
to the straight wire. Nd2I 1
Pm sin d Nd2I
4 2
9. C
By using Ampere’s Circuit law 12. B
B × 2r1 = 0Ienc In thi s situation equivalent current is
flowing along the curved surface of the cyl-
r1
Ienc = br × 2rdr inder as shown in figure.
0
0br12
B=
3
10. D
dx
O
dM Y B = 0K = 0v0
(C) At any outside point, B = 0
O
X
2D view of toroid
www.motion.ac.in
186 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
13. B
0J
(2x) 0 Jx
0i 2
6 7
(a) B0 î [10 10 10] î = 0
2(2) for point P outside the plane (x>d)
d
(b) B = (10 6 )2 (10 6 )2 10 6 2 T 0 Jdr
BB =0Jd when x > d
d
2
y
B0 î 15. A
z
x I
=
2R Behave as
× wire
dI = . Rd
0 Rd
dB =
B0 î 2 R
45º
B = z
/2
0
dBsin , =
0
2
i
02
4 R
z
/2
B0 (k̂ ) 0i
B = dBcos =
0 4 2 R
0 î
(c) B0 + = 10–6 × 5 î 0i
2(0.5)
Bnet = 2
4 2 R
14. C
The linear current density along the plane of 16. B
sheet at a distance r from the central plane
of thickness dr is given by,
I Jldr
i
e
= b2 a 2 ,
j z
Bdl 0 ir
Jdr
l l
0 ic 2
P
x
B(2c) = b 2 a 2
e j a
c
r
dr 0 ic
The magnetic field at point P due to this e
B1 = 2 b 2 a 2
j
elemental sheet at a distance of x (<d) from
median plane is, when – is taken
B2 = 0
0 0 Jdr
dB Bnet = B1
2 2
x d
0 Jdr Jdr
B d 2 x 02
2
BP 1 BP 1
As B I so B 3 and B 3
Q R
C 1 A
r So BP.d l C B .d l = 50
dr B 3 Q
B A
and A BR .d l C BQ.d l = 150
di = br.2 pr.dr
From ampere’s law -
B C A
B.d l A
B.d l B.d l
B
C
B.d l = 0I
z z 2
di 2 br dr , iin = z
r
0
2 br 2 dr
20. A
F q V B ma
1
2 br 3 S t a 2
= 2
3
21. B
0 2 br 3
br 2 The loop encl oses current I only and
B(2r) = , B= 0 direction of current is positive in accordance
3 3
to Right handed screw rule. So B.d l = 0I.
0 2 bR 3 0 bR 3
(b) B.2r2 = = 22. C
3 3r2
Contact looses when N = 0
V = g sin . t
mg cos = q g sin t B [N = 0]
18. B
m cot
t=
B.d l = 0(i1+i3+i6+i8) (as i2,i4,i5 and i7, do qB
not lie inside the loop)
= 0(1+3–6–8) i0 = –100i0 23. C
B
19. C 90°
V
From the symmetry of figure, and using the
fact that B I we can find the line integral 53°
of BP, BQ & BR over various parts of closed
loop. From given information. 53°
R
B A R
BP.d l = 40 & B .d l 150
A C Q
d
From symmetry
B A
BP.d l = BP.d l = 40 3mv mv
A C d= ,R=
5qB qB
B C
BQ.d l = BQ.d l = – 120
A B
www.motion.ac.in
188 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
24. C 29. B
K.E of -particle = work done by electric
force. y
1 25
qEx0 = m5 2 , x0 = F1 a
2 2E0
×
a
F
25. D F
x
2V0 = V02 Vx2 F2 = 0
30. B
26. B
As the radius of the circle is constantly de- m
creasing hence we conclude that B is in- T0 2 0.57 s
61B
mv
creasing as r = . = –MB = –iBl2
qB
M/4
A particle looses energy by ionising the air.
M/4 M/4
27. A
y M/4
M l2 Ml 2 Ml 2 Ml 2 Ml 2
× ×
I= =
4 12 4 12 4 4 4 4 6
2mv
v0 x y= I Ml 2
qB T = 2 = 2
k
6 il 2B
z
M
= 2 = 0.57 s
6iB
28. B
Because it is a closed loop so Fres = 0.
31. B 35. A
The field produced by magnet if it is kept
Q Q Q
= along last of deflection magnetometer
Area Rh h2 tan
0 M
is while when kept along south the mag-
x 1 4 d 3
r tan
0 M
netometer is .
r = x tan
x
4 d 3
dq = [2r dx] dq Magnetic field is proportional to tan
r
= [2 x tan dx] dx 1
if tan becomes half, then = tan-1 .
2
i = dqf = dq R
2
36. A
dm = i Ar = i. r = ix tan
2 2 2
eL
=
2m e
dm = x3 tan3 × 2 . dx . . L = nh
2
e
=
h
2m e (nh)
3
. x dx n where n = 1,2,3 ............
M= dm tan
0
37. A
W = – MB (cos 2 – cos 1)
.tan3 h4 .Q /(h2 tan).h4 tan3
M
4 4 38. A
(Theoretical)
Q.h2 tan 2
M
4 39. D
Using formula r = (1 + Xm)
FB Where r = relative permeability of medium.
32. A
= 2n and Xm = magnetic susceptibility of medium.
34. B
(Theoretical) 40. B
Due to opposi te sp i n of el ec trons i n
diamagnetic material an atom does not
behave as a complete magnet in it self.
www.motion.ac.in
190 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
3. A, B, C 7. A,B,C
The variation of B with r for solid current
E
x= m/sec. z = m/sec carrying wi re (uni form di stri buti on of
B CR
current across the cross - section of wire) is
shown below.
1
y = m/sec.
0 0 B
4. A, B, C, D
(A) Direction of magnetic field produced due 1
r
to the two wires on x axis have opposite
direction Bnet = 0.
r
R
B
(B) a × × b 8. A,B,C
Use the concept as illustrated by diagrams.
B
a & b have only z component.
Bnet
(C)
× ×
Bnet has only y component as z component Act as South Act as North
Pole current is Pole current is
gets cancelled
clockwise and clockwise
(D) Bx = 0 in net B
P will acquire North pole due to induction
Due to magnetic material of tube induction
5. A, D y y
effect is more prominent and initial force of
1
0i attraction increases.
B= B 2
2 2 l
As direction x x 9. B,C,D
of magnetic Use principle of super position and concept
field is to z of magnetic field due to thick cylinder.
10. B,D
0R 3
outside the conductor is ; B2 =
dx 3r
Current flowing per unit length = = v
dt A plot of B as a function of r is shown in
l figure.
12. A,D
2m T1
By Ampere’s law B + B = 0v T= ;T =1
qB 2
0 v
B=
2 mV sin 30 mV sin 60
r1 = ; r2 =
qB qB
11. A,D
B 1
The p rob- b=
3
lem can be 3
sol v ed b y Pitch 1
= vcos30° T1
us i ng the Pitch2 = vcos60° T2
Ampere’s
abc = 1
law : R
r
c= 3
B.d l 0Ienc a = bc
Where the enclosed current Ienc is given by
13. C,D
Ienc J.dA (r)(2rdr)
W. D. by mag. field is zero
(a) For r < R, the enclosed current is
r
e
Fmg = q v B j
2r3
2
Ienc 2r dr
0
3
14. B,C
Applying Ampere’s law, the magnetic field at
Work Done by magnetic force = 0
P1 is given by
2 0 r 3
0 2 e
f = q vB j
B1(2r) or B1 = r
3 3
15. A,B
The direction of the magnetic field B1 is tan-
g enti al t o the Am pe ri an l oop whi c h
encloses the current.
(b) For r > R, the enclosed current is :
R
2r3
Ienc 2r2dr
0
3
In order to reverse the direction of electron
it should of electron it should turn back taking
2 0 R 3
which yields B2(2r) = a circular path. The necessary centripetal
3
force will be provided by magnetic force on
Thus, the magnetic field at a point P 2 the moving electron.Electron can turn if
Fcentripetal is in x-y or x-z plane
www.motion.ac.in
192 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
2. Zero 5. 0.10 mT
Since the directions of current in two halves Magnetic induction at the centre of the rect-
are opposite and the magnitude is same, the angular frame is the sum of the magnetic
resultant intensity will be Zero. fields produced by the four sides of the
square. This field may be calculated w.r.t.
the given Figure as below
1/2
l
l
r
1/2
3. 4 105 T 0 2I
B 2. (sin 15° + sin 15°)
The field produced due to one side AB is 4 d cos 15°
0I 2I
B= (sin1 + sin2) Here 1 = 60 = 2 and
4r (sin 75 sin 75°)
d cos 75°
r = l/2 cot 60°
and there are three sides Total induction 0 I
or B (tan15 cot15)
d
3 10 7 1 2 3 3 3
4.5 10 2
2 2 2 20 I 2 2 4107 5 2
=
d sin 30° 0.16 1
3 107 2 3 i.e. B = 0.10 mT
B 4 105 T
4.5 102
6. 2B
0i
B2 =
2R
0 I 2
8. B
4 b a 2R = 2R’ × 2
0 I 0i 1 3
B2 (2 ) 12.
and ...(2) 8 R R'
4 a
Resultant magnetic field strength at the point 0i
O is given by B=
8R
B = B1 + B2
from the above in the
0 I 2 given Ques.
i.e. B ...(3)
4 b a
0i 1 3LM OP
B = 8 R R'
N Q
9. 5 × 10–4 T towards west
N
X 0I 1 1
13.
W E 4 R1 R 2
Y
facing west
0i 0i
Bnet = 4 R 4 R
S 1 2
0 20 16
for X B=
2 16 10 2 0I
14.
= 4 × 10–4 T (East) 4 R 3
0 25 18 B
for Y B= A
2 10 10 2
i
i
= 9 × 10–4 T (West)
C D
10. 0 0 i 30 i
B1 sin60
4 2Rsin30 B R
Bnet = 0 0 i 0 i
B2 sin30
4 2Rsin60 8 R 3
x x 0 i
Bnet B1 B2
4 3 R
www.motion.ac.in
194 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
z
B. dl = From formula
ne A Vd = i
i
Vd =
× × neA
18.
iB
22.
An
From formula
19. 1.3 ×10-4T
qiB iB
N = 10 N = 10 F = qVd B, = ,F=
neA An
4 cm
4 cm
1A
1A iB
23.
Ane
6 cm
qE = qVdB
10 0 1 16 8 4 10 4 E = VdB
B1 =
2 10 4
LM 16 36 OP 3/ 2 =
b52g 3/ 2
iB
N10 10 Q
4 4 =
neA
= 0.26 × 10–4 T
10 0 1 100 i Bd
B2 = = 1.5 × 10–4 24.
24 Ane
2B2q2 m F 0i1i2
h= 2 q = 2gh
2m g B 2
10 10 3
z z
r2
dw 0 i1i 2 dr
= 2 10 3 2 q = 15 C
(20 10 ) 0. 1 2 r
r1
i W 0 i1i 2 r2
0iJ0 d
27. tan –1 (–k ) l
=
2
ln r
1
2h
dF
h
dF
so dFnet =2 cos J0 0 iqv
x 30.
dx 2a
d
J dx h
0 0 0 i1i 2 q
= 2i
F= . , id = . v
2 x 2 h2
x h2
2
2 a
q
d/ 2 i= .v
2 i 0 J0 h dx
Fnet =
2 x
0
2
h2
F 0iqv 0 iqv
,F=
2a 2 a
www.motion.ac.in
196 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
31. 10 k I
n=
Force on electron due to electric field is in e
+y direction. For undeviation force due to No. of e– in 1 sec.
magnetic field should be in -y direction.
change in momentum in 1 sec. = nmv force
Hence by right hand thumb rule the magnetic
field should be in –z direction. mEI
=
Be
Magnetude : qE = qvB
5 107
B= = 10 T 0II' C 1 1
5 106 34. – to the left
2 a b
3mv 2
32.
4qa F1
(0, a) ĵ
F4 c
F2
î
(2a, 0)
(a)
a
k̂ F3
2v
1 1 F1 = F3
qE 2a = m (2v)2 – mv2
2 2
0II' C 0II' C
F4 = ; F2 =
3mv 2 2a 2b
3mv 2
qE ,E=
2.2 a q 4a Fnet = F4 – F2
0II' C 1 1
3mv 3 =
(b)
4a 2 a b
3mv 3
F.v = qE v =
4a dB q
35. t=m , where = sin–1 if d < R
qB 2mV
(c) zero
; T / 2 if d > R
Zero (because angle b/w f & v is 90°)
mv 2mqv
r
qB qB
mEl
33.
Be 2m
T
eE = evB qB
E angle = t
v=
B
2
t
I = ne nos of e– 1 sec. T
T a2
t
2 = î B 120 1 2(a2 cos30º ) cos60º ĵ
2 180 2
If d < R
d sin dqB 3
sin ,
2mqv = î Ba 2 ĵ
R
3 4
2
t .t
T 38. 2s
T 2m 1 m I
t T 2
2 qB 2 aB MH
36. At angle
M
Magnetic moment of each part =
3
B = MB cos = i l2 B cos
mg = mg /2 sin xy I
& Moment of inertia of each part =
3
net i l 2B cos – mg / 2 sin
Magnetic moment of combination (M’)
/ 2
= M and I’ = Moment of inertia of combina-
M
w net d 0
0
mg tion
B
( K = 0)
I
3× = I.
3
Bil2 sin 0 / 2 + mg cos 0 / 2 0
2
Bil2 = mg /2 I' T'
T ' 2 1
M 'H T
mg
B=
2i
qV 0I
F = q (VB) = [ 3 3 ]
6a
(b) = M B MB( ĵ) = î AB( ĵ)
www.motion.ac.in
198 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
8 2 0l 3
1. 4. 1
2 4r 2
0I I I 4 0 I
B= 2
. 0 2 .R 0 . r
4R 4R 4R / 2
2
r=
I2
0 i 3 0 i
0 I 0 I 0 I (o,d) B=
x 4 R 2 4 R
B'
2r 2 2 4 I1
F
(Fneed)max = + Fr
2 +
0i
3.
j–i F/2 fr
2a
=
F
2
1 3
y = 0.88 N 30º .
J
(0,0,-a) x I z
x
0i ˆ ˆ
Bnet =
2a
j i
B 0i1i2 30 0i1i2
dF
2 tan d = nsec30
–60
v/2 S – 60 2
7. v x 0I1I2 0i1 i 2
n 3 F n 3
3 2 4
v
2
2m
T=
qB I2 L2 a2
V
10. F 0 ln
2 a2
–k , zero
T = 0.1
2
× ×
V 2m 2mK r
. = = 0.1
2 qB qB
( 90 )
x dx
mv 2
. = 0.1 B
2 qB × × B
B = 4.7 × 10 –3
T
dF = i dx . 2B cos . = i dx . 2
2 0i
8. 0 i x i2 x
3 a . = 0 2 .dx
2r 2 2
a x 2 2
a x
0I1I2
9. ln (3) along – ve z direction
4
2 a2
tan = y/a dF = i2 dy B sin
0 i2 x 0 i2 t dl
y = a tan dF i 2 dy
0i1
sin
=
0
a2 x 2
.dx =
a
t2
2a sec
dy = a sec2d
a2 + x2 = t2
i i sin cos 0 i2 2 a2
Now dF 0 1 2 .a sec2 d 2x dx = 2t dt = n a2
2
2a
y II case zero B | |
i2 0I0 3b
30° a 11.
2 (a 2 b2 )
60° x
i1
z d a2 b2
Bvertical = (BR – BT) cos
0I0 2 2
dy dF = 2d cos sin t 3 – sin t – 3
y
a
www.motion.ac.in
200 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
S B2
R b T B1
a B1'
= 2R + B'2
d
0IR (2R–b)
BR
2d
In y-axis
I
BT 0 T
2d
0 jR 2 0 ja 2
( i), B 2
B1 = 2(2R)
0I0 2 2 2 b 2 (2R)2
cos sin t cos cos t sin –
2 d 3 3
at angle from y-axis.
0I0 2 0 j R2 a4 R a2
cos 2 cos t sin = 2 2 sin
2 d 3 4 b 2 4R 2 2 b 2 4R 2
0I0 3
BVertical cos 2 cos t 0 j R2 a4 a 2R 2R
2 d 2 = 2 .
4 2 2 2 2
b 4R b 4R b 4R 2
2
I 1 b 3
= cos t 0 j R 2 (b 2 4R 2 ) 4a 2 8a 2R 2
00 .
2 2 2 =
a b a2 b2 2 b 2 4R 2
0I0b 3
(B vertical )amp 0 j R2b2 4(R4 a4 ) 8a2R2
2(a 2 b 2 ) =
2 b2 4R2
B B1( î ) B 2 sin ( î ) B 2 cos ( ĵ)
0 J a2 R
12. (a) B = –
2 2R – b 2 ,
2R b
B1 B2 î B2 ĵ
b 2
( 2R ) 2
b 2
( 2R ) 2
1 a2
JR
(b) Bx = 0 4 – 2
2
4R b
0 j a 2R R j a 2b
= 2 î 0 ĵ
b 4R 2 4 2 b 2 4R 2
0 J a 2b
By = –
2 4R2 b2 in x direction
J 2 2
0JR 0Ja
B B1 'B 2 ' ( ĵ) = 2(2R) 2(2R b) ĵ
b
0J R a2
ĵ
2 2 2R b
kq 2
m 2r .... (1) a a
r2 D A
×
kq 2 (BC+BA) (BD +BB)
q1rB m12r ....(2)
r2 2a
kq2 mv 2
(A) .... (1)
r2 r
F/2
kq2 mv12 F+ F/2
Now qv1B ....(2) 3F/2 F/2
2 r
r
axis = MB
= NiAB
(i) | B A || BB || B C ' || BD | B
time = 20 min
www.motion.ac.in
202 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
17. (A)
0i
BAB = [sin + sin ]
4 x 2 (a / 2) 2
0i 2( a / 2 )
• = .
2 2 2 2
4 x ( a / 2) a 2 a
x
2 2
B A
i
0i
=
B ( 4x a )(2a 2 4 x 2 )
2 2
BA 2 2
x (a / 2)
only vertical component remain and add.
x
So Bresultant = BAB vertical = 4BAB sin
i
AB 4 0ia a/2
a/2
= 2 2 2 2
(4 x a )( 2a x 4) x (a / 2)2
2
0 ia2
=
( 4x 2 a 2 )(2a 2 4x 2 )1/ 2
4 0 ia2 2 2 0i
(B) x = 0, B =
2 2 1/ 2 a
a
2 a (2a )
x2
2
1. D
4 x 107 x 3
Magnetic force F = qvB ...(i)
2 x 0.02
Centripetal force
3 x 105 Wb / m2
mv2
F ...(ii)
r
B B2P B2Q (4 x 10 5 )2 (3 x 105 )2
From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we have
5 x 105 Wb / m2
mv2
qvB
r
4. A
mv
or r The force per unit length between the two
qB
wires is
The time taken by the particle to complete
one revolution, x x x x xv x F 2I2 I2
o. o
x x x x x x l 4 d 2d
2r x x x x x x
T The force will be attractive as current
v x x directions in both are same.
x x x x x x
2mv 2m
x x x x x x
vqB qB 5. D
x x x x x x
Full scale deflection current
2. C 150
mA 15mA
Magnetic needle is placed in non-uniform 10
magnetic field. It experiences force and torque Full scale deflection voltage
both due to unequal forces acting on poles.
150
mV 75mV
2
3. C
Galvanometer resistance,
BP
B
75 mV
G 5
15 mA
I1=3A
Required full scale deflection voltage,
BQ
V = 1 x 150 = 150 volt
I 2=4A
Ig R G
Q V
Let resistance to be connected in series is
I 4 x 107 x 4 R.
BP o 2
2R 2 x 0.02 V = Ig(R+G)
or 104 = R +5
I
BQ o 1 or R = 10000 - 5 = 9995
2R
www.motion.ac.in
204 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
6. B 10. A
Let E and B be along X-axis. When a -charged As v of charged parti cl e i s remai ning
particle is released from rest, it will experience constant, it means force acting on charged
an electric force along the direction of electric partical is zero.
field or opposite to the direction of electric field
depending on the nature of charge. Due to this ExB
So, q(vx B) qE vx B E v
force, it acquires some velocity along X-axis. B2
Due to this motion of charge, magnetic force
cannot have non-zero value because angle 11. C
between v and B would be either 00 or 1800.
Y I
So, only electric force current density , J =
a2
is acting on particle
and hence, it will move B
From Ampere's circuital law
X
along a straight line. E
Z
B.dl .I
o enclosed
7. B For r <a
Ferromagnetic substances have strong
oI r
tendency to get magneti sed (i nduced B x 2r = o x j x r2 B x
a2 2
magnetic moment) in the same direction as
that of applied magnetic field, so magnet I
a
attracts N1 strongly. Paramagnetic substances At r , B1 o
2 4r
get weakly magnetised (magnetic moment
induced is small) in the same direction as For r >a
that of applied magnetic field, so magnet r
oI
attracts N2 weakly. Diamagnetic substances B x 2r oI B
2r
also get weakly magnetised when placed in
an external magnetic field but in opposite
direction and hence, N3 is weakly repelled by oI
At r = 2a, B2 a
magnet. 4a
B1
8. A B 1
2
d
dI I,
17. A
The magnetic field in between because of Magnetic field at centre due to this
each will be in opposite direction portion,
oi oi o 2dI
Bin between = ĵ ( ĵ ) dB .
2x 2(2d x) 4 R
dB
oi 1 1 oI
d
= 2 x 2d x ( ĵ ) 22R dB
Net magnetic field at the centre.
at x = d, Bin between=0
/2
For x < d, = Bin between = ( ĵ ) oI
dB cos
B =
/ 2
22R
For x > d, = Bin between = ( ĵ )
/2
Towards x, net magnetic field will add up and oI
cos d
direction will (ˆj )
/ 2
2R
www.motion.ac.in
206 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
20. C R o Q R Q
Induced emf B dB dr o
0 2R 2 0 2R
e = BHlv = 0.5 x 10-5 x 2 x 1.50
= 0.15 10-3 V = 0.15 mV 1
i.e., B
R
21. D
Let us consider the disc 23. B
to be made up of large For charged particle in magnetic field, radius
x
number of concentric
elementary rings. mv 2Km
r
dx qB qB
Consider one such ring
of radius x and thicknes
dx. 1 m2v2
[as mv = p K = mv2 p2 / 2m
2 2m
Charge on this elementary ring.
dq = x 2xdx p = 2Km ]
= 2xdx
Current associated with this elementary ring. m
r
q
dq
dI dr x f xdx
dt or md = 2mp and qd = qp :
m = 4mp
Magnetic moment of this elementary ring.
and q = 2qp
dM = dIx2 = x3dx
Magnetic moment of the entire disc, mp 2mp 4mp
rp ; rd : r = : :
R qp qp 2qp
M dM
0
1 : 2 :1
R
r = rp < rd
3 1
x dx
0
R 4
4
24. A
B
22. A Coercivity = 3 × 103 A/m
0
Taking an elemental ring of
radius r and thickness dr, B = 0 (3 × 103) = 0 nI
R or
we obtain magnetic field at
100
the centre of the ring dr = 0 0.1 I
Q
.2rdr 3 103 0.1
o o dq o R 2 I= =3A
dB di . .
2r 2r T 2r 2 100
oQ
dr
2 R 2
25. A 28. C
For equilibrium = 0
= MB sin n̂ I I
If, sin = 0; = 0 2R = 4a
If angle between M and B is zero, then stable a 2 a
= =
equilibrium R 4 R 2
If angle between M and B is , then unstable
equilibrium a
R
a
26. C
Cross-sectional view 0i i
(Both solenoids are i1
i2 BA= B = 0 2 2
2R B a
taken to be ideal in
BA 0i a
nature.) = ×
BB 2R 2 20i
Both wires will attract each other, but net
force on each wire will be zero. a 2
= = =
Concept: 4 2R 4 2 2 8 2
Two current carrying
elements attract each
29. C
other if direction
For electromagnet & transformer hysteresis
of current is same.
loss is less.
F.B.D
F1 0
F2 0
27. D
L L
0i2
i x
d 2d
0i2
tan =
2d
.g.
.g. sin
i2 = . cos (2) d [d = 2L sin]
0
gL
i = 2 sin 0 cos
www.motion.ac.in
208 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
NAB 1 2 1 2
Hence, I kmax
(c) Q × 2 l i0 2 2
Substituting the values, we get
(a) = MB = ki
BNA
max = q
k MB
NiA 2I
B NBA
i i
BNAQ
or ...(i)
I
4. A P ; B P,Q,S ; C Q,S; D Q,R
1 2 1 2
Hence, I kmax 5. A
2 2
From x = a to x = 2a
BNA z
max Q F q( v B ) qv 0B 0 k̂
2I
so
from x = 2a to x = 3 a a 2a 3a x
2BiNA BNA
2. (a) k = BNA (b) k = (c) Q F qv 0B 0k̂
2I
I = BNAQ
Due to inner loop magnetic field due to
BNAQ
or ...(i) outer loop magnetic field. ×
I
7. A Q ; B R,S ; C S; D P, Q, R For r
E = 0 [due to symmetry]
8. C
V+ < – V– V+ + V– < 0
= I+A1 – I1A2 I[A1 – A2] 0
9. A,C,D
In region II, the particle follows a circular B0
path of radius I+ = I– but radius of loop are different.
mv For s
r – + –
qB E=0 P Q
V+ + V– 0 m
Therefore, the particle can enter region III if
– + –
r > . B0 B+ B–
2r 2 mv 2m
T 12. A
v v qB qB
The particle will return to region I if the time As B TC By given graph B2 > B1 TC1 TC2
For P
Symmetrically charges placed so B
E=0 7.5T
V+ = V– V+ + V– = 0
Inet = 0 B = 0 and = 0 So B option is correct.
For q 14. C
2T sin d = i. 2R d
E1 E2
E3 = 2R
– + – + – +
T
3 2 1 1 2 3 R= T
2
E1 + E3 – E2 > 0 E 0 IB
T=
V+ = – V– V+ + V– = 0 2
Inet = 0 B = 0, = 0
www.motion.ac.in
210 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
M = iA = Ia2(1 + /2) k̂
17. A
If we take a small strip of dr at distance r
from centre, then number of turns in this 21. D
X
strip would be, X X
B.dl i0 in
X
r
X
N
dN dr X X
b a 2 R 2
B . 2r = 0 × J r – 4 ;
XR
Magnetic field due to this element at the
centre of the coil will be
0 J 2 R 2
0 (dN)I NI dr B = 2r r – 4
0
dB =
2r (b0a) r
As r = R/2 ; there fore B = 0
r b 0NI b
B dB
r a
In
2(b a) a 22. D
20cm S
18. C,D S N
2R
0i (x 0 2x1 )
R = 2x (x x )
1 0 1
Mv 2 MV
0I qVB = r=
= (outside) r qB
2r
Opp. direction :
25. C 0i 1 1
B2 =
2 x1 x0 x1
0ia2 oi
cos
2a h 2
2 3/2
2 a2 h2
0i x0
=
2 x1(x 0 x1 )
0i
cos
2 a2 h2 r1 B2 x0 (x0 x1 )x1
Thus r = B = x (x x ) × (x 2x )
2 1 1 0 1 0 1
a 2
a 2
h
2 3/2
a h2
2
r1 x0 3x1
r2 = (x0 2x1 ) = (3x1 2x1 ) = 3
a 2 a2 4
a 2
h
2 1/ 2
a 2
h2 2
28. C
a = 0.4a + 0.4h
2 2 2
B
0.6a2 = 0.4h2 Coercivity = 3 × 103 A/m
0
3 2 B = 0 (3 × 103) = 0 nI
h2 = a
2
h 1.2 a 100
= 0 0.1 I
3 103 0.1
I= =3A
100
www.motion.ac.in
212 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
V1 V2
L w1 d2 w B = w2 d2 w B d1 V1 = d2 V2
1 2
d1 = 2d2 V2 = 2V1
L = 2 (L + R) d1 = d2 V1 = V2
Net force on wire will be F = i (L B)
31. A,C
I1 = I2
if L B , then F =i | L | | B | = 2i (L + R) B
n1 e A1 vd1 = n2 eA2 vd2
if L || B , then F = 0
n1 vd1 = n2 vd2
V1 V2
n1 w B = n2 w B
1 1 2 2
If B1 = B2 then n1V1 = n2 V2
1. A 6. C S
B = 10-1 T = 0.1 T.
N
Fi e l d l i nes t hrough l oop
S
2. A increases so induced lines are
in downward direction so S
= NBA
a < g.
= 500×5×10-3 ×2×10-3 N
= 50×102 ×10-6
= 5×10-3 Wb. 7. B
The loop is rotated in clockwise direction so
current flows in AC direction so the forces
3. C
on the poles are as shown and hence magnet
= B. (R0 + t)2 rotate clockwise.
d
E= = 2B (R0 + t)
dt
× B . B
S N
4. D
d
× F . F
12t 5
dt
at t = 0.25 sec.
8. C
12 10.25 5 2 The surfac e i s c onduct i ng he nc e i t s
equipotential.
2 B
i 0.2A
R 10 A
2v
r 2r v
5. B P Q
d 0er 2
E
dt
4R
.
v B ·l
10. B
dl vector is same in both the cases.
www.motion.ac.in
214 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
11. D 16. C
There is no change in flux so induced emf is
zero. C
Vy l2 Vx
A B
12. A l1
VB – VA = Vy l1 B , VB – VC = Vx l2 B
F
E
17. A
A C B
13. C L A C B
q = CV
VA – VC = VB – VC
q = C × V0 Bl = constant
VA – VB = 0
14. B
X
18. C
d
dx 10cm
a 0i
B=
2x dE
7cm
B x dx
a d
0i 10cm
d
d
2x
.b.dx
VA – VB =
2 10 x2
= 0.051
2 2 7cm
0ib d a
= n
2 a 19. B
The direction of induced current is such that
d 0bi d a
ln it opposes the effect of change in magnetic
dt 2 a field.
15. A 20. B
The direction of induced current is such that
it opposes the effect of change in magnetic
field.
21. C
d
2 M
di,
4
0 5 = 2 ×104 V.
dt 103
l l d
1 = v0d B0 1 , 2 = v0d. B0 1
a a
v0 B0d v0 B0 d2
2 – 1 =
a a
22. B 27. D
L×N 2 q = CV = CV Bl = constant
2
108 600 28. C
L ' 500 Theortical
25 29. C
L ' 100 = 75 mH
36 10
Initially L is open imin = = 1A
10
i = i0 sint 10
imax. = = 2A
5
1000
B = m0ni = 4×10-7 (1) sin t imax – imin = 2 – 1 = 1A
102
= 4× 10-2 sint 30. A
= NBA = 50×4×10-2 sint×10-4
di
= 2×10-4 sint e = –L
dt
d di
22 102 2 104
dt = slope
dt
12
150º
0º
f = 50 Hz.
tan 150º = –1/ 3
d 1 R
= = (aT –2at) , (Frequency)
dt RC L
T 2
Heat = aT 2at dt
a2 T 3
32. A
0
R 3R
+ iR – + –
Ldi/dt
25. C E
2AB
q= Ldi
R R = E – iR (straight line with -ve slope)
dt
26. B
33. C
= BA
1 2 dE 1 di
E= Li .2.Li
d AdB 2 dt 2 dt
v B . e = CA (Straight line)
dt dt
di
Ein as r > R = Li
dt
= 2 × 2 × 4 = 16 J/sec.
www.motion.ac.in
216 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
34. A 38. C
A rapid flux change in L
L = , iL = N , iL = NBA
i
NBA 39. A
i=
L
diB
EA = m.
dt
35. B
R 2L 4 i
i i0 e R / L t i0e
L R =2×
10 10
i = 2 ampere
i0
i0e 2 0.136i0 13.6%
e2
40. A
36. A 1
C
00
BW
41. A
O W 3W 4W S FE qE, FB qV B
d 42. D
dt
B l
f ,
3W 4W 2 Lc
S
W
B
C C
but 377 m.
f 1 1
2 LC
F
v 2B2 43. A
F=
R
S V = fC
W 3W 4W
44. B
c 3 108
37. D C = V, 1.5 102 m
v 2 1010
at t = 0 the circuit will be open
i=0
Ldi
U = 0 But 0
dt
P=0
1. A 7. D
A B
45º
vt
2. D eE F1 F2 F1 F2 . m
E
i2 is constant. m M Me
v 2 .1 1mA
= 10–3 VB
4vBa vB
4 i
4ra r
v = 2 cm /sec.
4. B 10. C
R
q E = vB . , iind
R
ilB
5. C F i( B)
During t = 0 to t = t1 mg
as v Eind i F
B is linear function of time
d
= = –ve (const.) 11. A
dt
At any time
N
d = BA cos t
During t = t1 to t2 = 0 (B is constant)
dt
During t = t2 to t1 B is linear function of time d W
E=– = BA sin t
with –ve slope dt
S
d E
=– = +ve (const.) i=
dt R
So induce current decrease its producing
6. A effect
So current will flow from P Q
www.motion.ac.in
218 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
B 18. A
12. B Bil
Bil = mg sin × 19. C
Self inductance for a solenoid is given as
0N2 r2
L=
13. D l
dx v
d = v B dx, Where N is numbers of turns
x
v0i
A B
d = . dx 100
2x r N1 =
2r
r l
v 0i 2
d 2x dx 100
0 R 2
r
2r
L1 = =L
l
v0i r l
v A – vB = ln
2 r 2 2
100 R
0
2r 2
L2 =
14. C l
d L1
e= E.dl dt L2
=1 L2 = L
(Br 2 ) dB
E.2R = d dt
, E.2R = R2 20. B
dt
Let a currect i flow in coil of radius R.
R dB 0i 2
E= × × Magentic field at the center of coil = r
2 dt × × R ×× 2R
×
F = qE × ×
× ××
× × 0i
or Mi = . r 2 , M = 0 r 2
e R dB 2R 2R
a= (leftwards) P
2 m dt
21. D
15. C
22. A
B l2
E= Let I = current in one loop. Then magnetic
2
flux at the centre of the other co-axial loop
1 at a distance from the centre of the first
= leffective B (L2 + 2) loop is
2
0 2I.a 2
loop is B ...(1)
16. D 4 (a 2 2 )3/ 2
25. D
2a 2I
0 2 2 3/ 2 a 2
4 (a ) M = L1L 2 = 2 8 = 4 mH.
0a 4
27. B
2(a 2 2 )3/ 2 x
vBl = 1 × .1 × .1
12 = M12 I = 10–2 volt
v 10–2
4
12 1 0 a x x x 10 2
M12 = 0 O O O
I 2 3 2 3 1
a << l. 3x + 2x + 6x – 6 × 10–2 = 0
11x = 6 × 10–2
23. C
6 10 2
x=
NI 11
B r 0
2r
6 10 2
Total flux associated with N turns and length 10 2
i = 11
2 a+b 1
r 0 IN dr
a is = .Ia
2 a
r
5 10 2 1
= amp.
11 220
2
r0 N a
= .aI log e 1+
2 b
28. D L
Inductance is given by
Ldi
V
N2a a dt
L= r 0 log e 1+
2 b Ldi = v. dt
Li = vt
24. B 4×5=2×t
magnetic induction inside the planes of tape t = 10 sec.
is = 0I, I is current through tape line.
0 29. C
then, magnetic field B I 5mH
b – + I
A – + 15V – + B
Flux associated with unit length of tape is
Ldi
0I VB – VA = + 15 + IR
h dt
b
VB – VA = 15 Volt
Then, corresponding value of inductance is
0 h
b
www.motion.ac.in
220 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
30. B 33. A
O 1 E
2V(V/R) R V V E = vb = ` i=
8 R
H = i2 RT = 3.125 × 10–3 J
O
R 3V 3V
34. A
t=0 t=
8
M L 1L 2
For M maximum
2V 2V M= L 1L 2
+ – 15V + – 35. B
A –+ I B
L
Charging = 1 =
di 2R
VA – VB = IR – 15 + L
dt
L
VA – VB = – 15 discharging = 2 =
3R
VB – VA = 15
36. C
31. A 4V
+ –
Ldi q +
1
2
4–2– 0, 2V
2 dt c –
2 R q/C
+ Ldi/dt
– + –
q
2–4– =0
c
32. B
q = 6 C
P = vi
400
t
37. A
vi0 1 e 200 vi0 1 e 2t
38. B
P1 vi0 1 e e 1 e
2 2 2
P2 vi0 i e4 e4 1
e
2
1 e2
e2
e
2
1 e 1 2 2
e 1
1. B,D 3. B,C
i1 i2
S N
P Q
dB
N Attraction
E=A
N S S dt
(D) I1 0 , I2 0 1 0.5
x
and in opposite direction
1 1
1
N S N
1volt 0.5volt
o
1 0.5
2. A,C,D
Both are individual loop
x 1 x 0 x 0.5 1
0 x
× × × × × 3 1 2 22
× × × × ×
× × × × × 5. A,B
× × × × ×
×
B
So current induced in clockwise direction (by
iB cos = mgsin
Lenz law)
6. A,B,C,D
& B are parallel.
www.motion.ac.in
222 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
7. B,D 9. A,D
C L VL = 0 imax. VR max
R R
10. A,C,D
E E Ldi
Power = i L1i1 = L2i2
dt
at t = 0 C acts as an open ckt
V2 1 W
Q = CE 2=4
V1 4 W1
at t = 0 L acts as short circuit.
E i1 1
i=
R i2 4
d
4t
dt ×B
v
10
4t dt = 200 rad/sec
0
= vB × 2R = vBd
d / 2 r
M1L2I2T 2 r
L
dvB
2. RCV M1L2I2T3 I2T4M1L2 M1L2I1T3
= I-1 d 2 vB
dvB = i 2 i =
r dB e E. er Frequired = idB + idB
3 E.F. = a= a k
2 dt m 2m
directed along tangent to the circle of radius 2 ( 2vB 2 ) d
Frequired =
r whose center lies on the axis of cylinder.
4. 5.0 V
= B A = B. r mgR
9. Vterminal = ;
B 2l 2
d dr
= B. . 2r = 5.0v (a) ilB = T = mg ilB = mg
dt dt
VB2l2 mgR
mg v 2 2
R Bl
1
5. A
3
g
1 B r 2 B r2 1 10.
i i= = Amp. 2
2 R 2R 3
(b) mg-T = ma
4 Bv v 2 B2
tan tan1 mg = i B =
3
3 104 R
Bv = 4 × 10–4
www.motion.ac.in
224 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
0himN b EL
12. ln dx 16.
2 a
x eR2
b b Rt q Rt
0iN
i = i0 1 e
L
T = d = 2x .dx. h
dq i
0 0
0
1 e L . dt
a a
q = Ei/eR2
N 0 i h b N0 h b
T = n = (im sint)n
2 a 2 a 17. kMT2/R
d N0 h b di1
= (im sint)n E2 = M
dt 2 a dt
E2 = M. 2 Kt
0 ab M. 2Kt
13. = ILln i2 =
2 a R
2x
a b
18. 42 + 20t volt
i .dx i
d = 0 di
2 x E-iR - L 0
a dt
dx E = (3+5t) 4 + 6 (5) = 42 + 20t
0 i a b a
= n
2 a x
0a b
19. M ln 1
2 c
14. 2N
Bvl c b
vB 0i1
i =
4 d 2x .a dx
c
F=i B b
c b
0i1a dx
vB 2 2 2
2 2 1 2
F= = F=2N = 2 x i1 c B
4 4 c
a
0i1a c b
2 = ln x
e 2 c
15.
e2 – 1
0i1a b
R = ln 1
t 2 c
i = i0 1 e
L
5H
at t = 1 0i1a b
10 = Mi1 = ln 1
15V 2 c
15 3
i0 = imax. =
10 2 0a b
M = 2 ln 1 c
1 i1 e2 1
i 1 = i 0 1 e2 i0
e2
25 10 3 5 l20
M= = mH R . (where 0 = density of wire)
15 3 V
5 l20
2 = Mi1 = × 3.6 × 10–3 .
3 m / 0
2 = 6 mwb
Rm
l02 ...(1)
21. 0.10 km 0
Magnetic induction at centre of solenoid is
0 NI 0 l02
L ...(2)
B= 4.l
l0
l0 is length of coil and l is length of solenoid
Then flux linked with whole solenoid is
0 N 2 r 2 I 0 Rm 0 mR
L
= NBA = ...(1) 4l 0 4 l0
l0
Also = LI ...(2)
0 N 2 r 2 r 0
L 23. In
lo 2
Let a and b be the inner and outer radii of
2 2 2 2 2
N .4.r N .4 .r b
or L 0 0 . cylinder so that
4lo 4lo a
Using Ampere’s circuital law
(N.2r) 2 B . 2r = 0rI
0 .
4lo
0 r I
Now N. 2r = l = length of wire used in B
2r
solenoid
then, flux linked per unit length is given by
.l2
L= 0 r b
0 r I 0 r I b
4l0 .1 dr log
r a
2 r 2 a
4l0 L As = LI
then l
0 coefficient of self induction is given
by
then l = 0.10 km.
r0 b
L log r 0 log
2 a 2
0 mR
22.
4 0
The resistance of the windings is
l0
R = . , is specific resistance.
A
www.motion.ac.in
226 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
B 0 av dB
1. i= in anticlockwise direction, = –ve
R dt
v = velocity at time t so net = 20 + 1.74 = 21.74 volts
B0l
v. .a
a 5. anticlockwise
d
= 2BV2t
B (l a)
v. 0 .a dt
a
(i) = 0.35 × (5.2)2 × 32 vt
2. Fnett = B0 a V/R
2 2
= 85.2 weber 45°
(b) iaB1 - iaB2 45° vt
d
vB oa2 Bo (l a) vB oa2 Bol B20a2v (ii) = = 2BV2t
. . dt
R a R a R
= 2 × 0.35 × (5.2)2 × 3 = 56
(iii) t so linearly increase with time
B20 a2 t
mgR mR
3. V = B 2 a2 1 – e
0 I(R 2x) 2I2 m (R 2x)
7. , + BId
Bd B 2 d2
mdv B2a2 v
F= = mg – 0 BVd
dt R
= BVd i= = constant.
R 2 x
dv dt
B20a2v m
mg F
R
R idB
By integration V
v
dv 1
t x
B 2 2
a v
m dt F – i dB = ma .......(2)
v0
mg 0 0
R eq. (1) BdV = i (2x + R)
B2a2 v x t
mg 2 2 dx
R tB0a
n
mg mR
Bd
0
( 2 x R )
= i dt
0
Bd 2x R
n =i t ..........(3)
4. 21.74 V 2 R
1
(i) = B. [Area of square]
2
R 2Bd
it
1.74 V x=
2
e 1 .........(4)
1
= (0.042 – 0.87 t) 4
2
= 2(0.042 – 0.87 × 2) 2it
20 V dx R 2i Bd
d v e .........(5)
= – 2 × 0.87 = – 1.74 volt dt 2 Bd
dt
2it
dv R i 2i Bd 0
a e 11. In
dt Bd Bd
a = radius of each wire
2Ri 2 2 it d = distance between wires
Bd
a e ........(6) For r > a,
B 2 d2
0 I
2mRi2 2x B = 2B’
F = i Bd + 1 r
B2d2 R
Flux linked with unit length of double
line is
Ri 2x
from (5) and (4) V= 1
Bd R d a
0 I I d
dr 0 In 1
a
r r a
1 2 d
8. (a) E = Br But (given)
2
a
0I
In (-l)
Br 2 |1 – e –Rt /L |
9. (i) I = , (ii)
2R
0 I
2 4
In ( >> l)
mgr B r
= cost + (1 – e–Rt/L)
2 4R = L I.
Inductance per unit length of double line is
10. 67/32 A 0
In
100
i1 = [1 – e–10 t]
10
at t = 0.1 n 2 sec 0 r Nh b
12. In
i1 = 10[1 – e–n 2] = 5 2 a
Now S2 opened
0 I
B
100 2r
and i2 = [1 – e–(40 + 10) t]
40 10
then, flux ()
now let i2 = 5 for time t then
b
i2 = 2[1 – e–50 t] = 5 ...........(1) 0r IN hdr 0 r NI h b
2 a r
In
now after time 0.2 n 2 sec
2 a
or for i2 (t + 0.1 n 2) sec Also, = MI
i2’ = 2[1 – e –50(t + 0.1 n 2)
] This gives the required mutual inductance
= 2[(1 – e )2
–50 t –5
+ 1 – 2–5] 0 r N h b
M In
67 2 a
= 5.2–5 + 2(1 – 2–5) from (1) i2’ = amp.
32
www.motion.ac.in
228 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
1. D
2 2
4 107 2 0.2 0.03
= 2 2
3/2
2. A 2 0.2 0.15
3. B = 9.09 × 10–11
4. D 11. (D)
E
=c
5. D B
6. B 4 0.2x
Induced emf
w= 10 3 3 10 e dx
14. D
E = hf E f
2L 3L 5 2
EMF =
2 LB = BL
2
R v
9. B
Knowledge based
D,B,A,C
10. (A)
0IR 2 0IR 2r 2
= 2 R 2 x2 3/2
× r = 2 R 2 x2
2 3/2
1. A
d dB
= = (0.1)2 .
2
( 0ni0 cos t)a (Ld) dt dt
2. I=
2R
0
= (0.1)2. I0 sin(300t) {300}
3. A,C
Magnetic moment M = i A = A
R
4. (A) P; (B) P, Q, S; (C) Q, S; (D) Q, R,S
(0.1)2 0 I0 300 sin(300t) (0.1)2
=
5. A R
6. D = 6 0 I0 sin (300 t)
7. C
8. A 13. A,C
As current inside = 0
9. APQST ; BQ ; CS ; DS so Magnetic flux = 0 in all cases.
(P) (A) : elec. energy stored.
(Q) (AB) energy supplied, increasing 14. 7
internal energy
At the position of square loop
(R) (none) energy reduces, heat flows
out, internal energy drops 0iR 2 0i
B= =
(S) (ACD) Mass to energy coversion 2(R 2 2R 2 )3/2 16R
(T) (A) Current flows leading to heat
generation 0i 1
= BA cos = 2a2
APQST ; BQ ; CS ; DS 16R 2
10. B,D 0 ia 2
= ,
qflow –1
, h v2 (q / m) (1 / m). 8 2R
d
12. 6 E.d l
dt B.dA
R<<
B = 0 ni d
E (2R) = (B) (R2)
0ni dt
B =
0n i dB
B E (2R) = R2
i dt
N = no. of turn
R dB BR
Ni = I = I0 (300 t) E= =
2 dt 2
www.motion.ac.in
230 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
16. BC
v x B2l2
BR v0
dv 0 Rm
dx
E=
2
B2l2
QBR v v0 x
F = QE = mR
2
=
MR 2 QB T
2M 0 0.1 di
e1 = = 0
dt
R 2QBT
Thus M=
2 2 1
Put T = 1 M = 1 = di2
di
dt dt
R2 QB
M=± If we consider
T
di1 di
= 2
dt dt
17. A,B
d 0
2 =
dt
Net force between the loop and the wire
dA is repulsive
B
dt
dx Iin
Bl
dt
= Blv 90°
i
i F1
R F1
i
F2
22
Bl
F k
R i
dv B2l2
mv k
dx R
1. D i same
Given T = 1s = 10 s -6
P1 > P2 > P3
40 watt
1 1
f 106 Hz
T 100
6. B
Theory
2. B
Given i = 4 sin (100 t + 30°)
7. A
at t = 0 ;
At resonance condition XL = XC then
i 4 sin 30 2A
ZR
100t 100 103
3 i 100m.Amp
1
1
t sec.
300 8. A
Given potential difference between the ends
of the resistance wire = VR
3. B
across capacitor VC = 2VR
and across the inductor VL = 3VR
at t = 0, i = 2 sin (100 t + )
3
then
2
i = 2 sin ,i= 3 Amp. V VR2 VL VC
3
2
VR2 3VR 2VR 2 VR
4. B
Theory
9. C
5. C XL = XC
Given P1 = 40 w, P2 = 60 w, P3 = 100 w Theory
1
R 10. C
P
In resonance condition
1 1
R1 0.25 1
P1 40
LC
R 3 R 2 R1
1
new new
LC
www.motion.ac.in
232 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
12. A 1 1
XC 2000
From Given data C 5
2 50 10 6
x
Vapplied = 10 V
VC = 8 V XL = XC then Z=R
8v
VR = ?
82 + x2 = 102 18. A
x = 6 volt VR
R R
4 % increase 0. 5 0 .866 100 = 73.2 %
= tan–1 3 R
0.866
13. C
19. A
V0
Vrms 220 Given R = 0 then
2
P = I2R = 0
14. C
XL t 1000 V
4
XL new 2 2t 4 1000 4000
3 I
53º
15. D
Z = 5
XL L 100 0.1 10
i = 2 sin (t – 53º)
100 VL = 8 sin (t – 53º + 90º)
i sin 100t 10 cos 100t A
10 2 = 8 sin (t + 37º) = 8 sin ( + 37º)
3
= –8 sin 37º = –8 ×
16. B 5
= –4.8 volts
X L L = 2f × L
1. C 6. B
Given V = 100 sin 100t e = 500 sin100t
i = 100 sin (100t + /3) 100
= /3 2f 100
f = 50
100
I rms = × 10 –3
A
2 7. D
0.4
100 L= H R = 30
Vrms =
2
V = 200 V Z= xL2 R 2
P = Vrms Irms cos
100 100 2
0.4 2
=
2
×
2
× 10–3 cos 3
= L 2 R2 = 2 50 30
P = 2.5 W
= 402 302 = 50
2. B Vrms 200
i= = =4A
z 50
Theory
8. D
3. C In LCR circuit net impedence
Given by
T
2 2
Z= R 2 xL xC
10 sin 314 t dt
0
Iavg T
When tuned to resonance then
2 XL = XC
dt0
z=R
9. C
2i In L–C oscilla tion
0 0.637 i0 0.637 10 = 6.37 A
q Ldi
=
c dt
4. D charge is decreasing i = – dq/dt
i
2
di d q
I12 =
Ims I02 dt dt 2
2 Q0 C L
2
d q
36 q/c = –L 2
9 9 18 27 3 3 dt S i
2
1
q = Q0 sin LC t 2
5. B
By concept
between q & i is –
2
www.motion.ac.in
234 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
10. A
3
Given V = 100 V D.C., I = 1 A, cos = 0.6 = 60º R
5
When 100 volt D.C. apply = 53º XC
V 100 cos = 0.5
i= = =1
R coil R coil = 60º
XC = XL
Rcoil = 100
when 100 V A.C. of 50 Hz then i = ½ A XL XC
tan 53º = R & tan 60º =
1 R2
100
Z=
1
2 4 XL X4
=R & 3 = R
3 1 4
2 2 2
Z = 200 = R coil L
R1 3 3
2002 = 1002 + 42 × 502 × L2
R2 4
On solving we get
3
L= H 13. A
V = 5 cos t = 5 sin (t +/2)
i = 2 sin t
11. C
= /2
E 141.4 P = Vrms × Irms cos
Z= = = 20 2
i 5
5 2
X XC = × cos /2 = 0
tan = L 2 2
R
By E and I
14. D
= 2
Given
XL = XC
V0 = 283 V R=3
1 L = 25 × 10 –3
H C = 400 × 10–6 F
then 2 =
LC
For maximum power XL = XC
= 5000
and L = 0.01 1 1
C = 2 =
L LC
C = 4F
R = 20 2
15. C
12. D 1
cos =
2
XL–XC
1
L – = 10 45º
c
XL 10
1
53º 100 0.1 = 10
100 c
R1
2f = 100 C = 500 F
16. D 18. C
L R
tan 60º = L = 0.6 H Paverage = irms Vrms .
R 2
= irms2 . R
1
tan 60º = C = 1.9 × 10–5 F = 22 × 5 = 20
RC
19. D
200
so I =
2
1
(100)2 300 0.6
5
3001.9 10
I = 2A
Power dissipated = 4 × 100 = 400 Watt
17. A
so RI = 12/4 = 3
Vrms
Irms =
RI2 ( L )2
12
2.4 = L = 0.08H
9 (50L)2
4A
RI
12V
2
Vrms
Power = 1
2 = 17.28 w
R 2 L
C
www.motion.ac.in
236 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
1. A,C,D 3. B,C
V = 200 sin (100 t) For maximum current XL = XC this can be
Compare this equation with V = V0 sin t achieved by either increasing XC or XL.
V0 200
V0 = 200 V, Vrms = 100 2 4. A,B,C
2 2
5 i0
1. 4. i=
6 2
i0
= i0 e–t/ t = n2 ....(i)
E = E0 cos (t + ) can be written as 2
3
i = i0 e–t/
E E0 sin t q t
2 3 t /
dq = i e
0 0
0 .dt
5
E0 sin t
6 q i0 e t / 1
By equestion (i)
5
Phase diff. =
6 ln2
q i0 e 1
dt
0
100V
60º
1 2 2 1/2 x
3. (i i )
2 1 2
T
(200)2 = (100)2 + x2
1 2
I1 cos2 t I22 sin2 t 2I1I2 sin t cos tdt
Irms
T x = 3 100
0
–
2
I2 R
1 I1
T 2 T 60º
T 2 2
1
C
1
I 2
1 I22 2
1
tan 60º = = 3
cR
c~
– 9.2 F
www.motion.ac.in
238 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
6. 20 V R2 = Z2cos2 = 23 (0.707)
= 16.26
v v2L v2R
XC = z22 R 22
144 256
2 2
= (23) (16.26) = 16.26
400
= 20v when resistance are connected in series
R = R1 + R2 = 39.26
7. 2H XL – XC = 14.41
Given C = 5 F, R = 10 and f = 50Hz 2 2
Z = R (xL xC ) = 41.82
cos = 1
R V 230
then cos = = 1 (a) i = = = 5.5A
Z Z 41.82
R 39.26
L = 1 cos =
z
=
41.92
= 0.939
c
since
1 1 20 XL > XC,
L= = 2 H
2 C 2 50 2 8 10 6
This power is lagging
V2 1
115 P R
Z1 = = 38.33 R P
3
R1 R1 P2 300 3
cos 1 = Z R 2 P1 500 5
1
R1 = Z1 cos1
= (38.33) (0.6) = 23
XL = z12 R 12 = 30.67
V2
Z2
I2
115
Z2 = = 23
5
– (3 + 5t) R – L5 = 0 E = 42 + 20t
1/2
T
= 1 (a b sin t)2 dt
T 0
P Q
1uf 4.9mH 68
1/2
T
1
Ieff = (a2 2ab sin t b2 sin2 t)dt
T 0 5.
T T 10V
1 1 2 1
but as
T
0
sin t 0,
T
0
sin t dt,
2
for max. current flow
1/2
2 b2 1
Ieff = a 2 L – =0
C
Resonance frequency
2
105
(68)2 4.9 103
7
3. c1+c2 L
= 97.6
2 2
1 7
ZP = R2 (32)2 5
Vmax C 6
imax = 10 10
1
L
(C 1 C 2 ) = 77
C1
so ic1 = C C . imax
1 2
www.motion.ac.in
240 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
1. B
Given L = 300 mH, R = 2, V = 2 V value between 0 to depending on the val-
2
The current at any instant is given by
ues of L and C.
Io (d) In a circuit containing L alone, the volt-
I Io (1 eRt / L ) Io (1 e Rt / L )
2
age leads the current by .
1 L, R 2
or (1 e Rt / L )
2 Hence, the option (c) is correct.
1
or e Rt / L 5. A L=100mH
2
This is a combined ex-
2V
Rt ample of growth and
or ln 2 decay of current in an
L A B
LR circuit. E=100V
1 1 I Ioe t /
or L or C
C 2L where = L/R
1 3
)/(100x103 /100) 1
C I 1 x e(1x10 A
2
4 x 50 x 50 x10 e
R 12 4 1
Power factor = cos 0.8 = A R
Z 15 5 e
4. C 6. C
(a) In a circuit having C alone, the voltage Given R = 1 k, C = 2F, = 200 rad./s,
V = 100 V
lags the current by
2 1
At resonance , L =
(b) In circuit containing R and L, the voltage C
9. D
1
VL = I XL = IL , but L Given L = 400 mH and R1 = 4 , R2 = 2,
C
V = 12 V
1 0.1 V 12
VL 250 volt I1 6A
C 200 2 106 R1 2 A
R1 L
1 dI
E L 2 R 2 I2
LC dt
I2 = Io (1-e-t/tc)
1 R2
200 200 S
L 2 106 E 12
Io 6A
R2 2
25
L H
2 L 400 x 10 3
tC 0.2 ,
R 2
1
VR IR 100 I 103 I
10 I2 6(1 e5t )
10. D
age by , so circuit is purely inductive and The given circuit is under resonance as
2
XL = XC Hence, Power dissipated in the cir-
there is no power consumption in the circuit.
cuit is
The work done by battery is stored as mag-
netic energy in the inductor. V2
P 242W
P = Vrms Irms cos R
XL
= P=0 R
2 tan30 XL
R 3
8. D XC R
tan30 XC
Rise of current in L-R circuit is given by R 3
I = I0 (1-e ) -t/
XL XC 0
E 5 10H
Where Io 1A P = Vrms Irms cos
R 5
V2 220 220
L 10 P= = 242W
2s 5V 2R 2 200
Now,
R 5
After 2s, ie, at t = 2s
11. B
Rise of current I = I0 (1-e-1)A.
At t = 0, inductor behaves like an infinite
R 5 resistance
E t 5 2
i 1 e L 1 e 10 1 e1
R 5 V
So at t = 0, i R
2
www.motion.ac.in
242 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
V V(R1 R2 ) Rt
i q2max q20e
L
R eq R1R 2
R
time constant =
12. A L
V since L1 > L2
1 < 2
Hence correct graph is 3.
R S1
Alternative solution
The value of Qmax reduces because of energy
C
dissipation in resistor. As the value of inductor
S2
increases the time taken for capacity to
L discharge or charge increases therefore heat
t
dissipation time decreases. Hence corrcect
q = CV 1 e RC
graph is 3.
15. B
At t = 2RC According to given conditions:
q = CV [1 – e ] –2
15
V
i0 = = = 0.1A
R 0.15 103
13. A
Rt 0 .15103 10 3
When BC are joined only i = i0 e L = 0.1 × e 0.03
L & R are in circuit – +
Applying KVL, R 0.1
= 0.1 × e–5 = = 0.67 mA
VR + VL = 0 + 150
L
VR = –VL –
VR 16. C
V =–1
L
210
R L= = 0.065 H
where b 10 100
2m 2L
1. B 8. A,C
Given = 100 rad/sec.
2. D (R1 = 100 , C = 100 F)
R2 = 50 , L = 0.5 H
3. C XL = L = 50
I1
100 2
1
4. B XC = = 100
c
50 2
I2
1
Z R2 2 2 V 20
C I1
R 100 2
20V
As z imax
at 45° with voltage.
So Bulbs glows brighter
I1
20 2
I2 =
5. (A) RST ; (B) QRST ; (C) PQ ; (D) 50 2 5 2
QRST
at 45° with voltage.
Net current I2
6. B,C
As C is filed with Dielectric C I I12 I22 = 0.3 A approx.
1
XC Z R 2 X C2
C 9. B
P = vi
IR IRB > IRA
i = 150 A
So drop across R increase &
R = 0.4 /km = 0.4 × 20 = 8 loss
VC VCA > VCB
H = I2 R
= 150 × 150 × 8
7. A
= 180000 J
180000
1 % power dissipation = ×100
R 1.25 R 2 600 1000
(500 C)2
= 30 %
1
1.25 R2 = R2 + 10. A
(500 C)2
Step - up
1 v 10
0.25 R2 =
(500 C)2 4000 1
v = 40000 volts
1
R=
(500 C) 40000
Step Down : 200
200
2 2
C= R C = 103 = 4 200 : 1
500 R 500
www.motion.ac.in
244 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
1mH
2mH
5V
I = I0 cos t
Min. current is at t = 0
I 1 1
V0 = 0 = 6 = 5
c 50.0 20 10 10 10 3 imin = A
12
1 Max. current is at t
= = 100
10 2
1
V = 100 cos (t – /2) = + +
R eq 3 4 12
V = 100 sin t
q0 = CV = 20 × 10–6 × 100
7
= 2 × 10–3 sin ×
6
7
= 2 × 10–3 sin
6
3
req =
2
= 2 × 10–3 sin 6
10
= –10–3 C imax = A
3
imax 10 12
imin = 3 × 5 = 8
1. C
Pt λ Eλ
No. of Photon= =
hc hc
hf = +ev s
if E is constant no. of photon is
2. A
7. B
hf =1.7+10.4=12.1eV=energy
-3
in H-atom 10
No.of Photons=
12400 -13
×1.6×10
5000
x=3
16
=0.25×10
12.09 ev -6
- 0.16×10 +12
n=1 No.of e reaching= =10
-19
1.6×10
12
10
%= ×100=0.04%
3. A 16
0.25×10
A Photon can interact with only a single
electron.
8. C
4. D Depends on f not on Intensity
As distance ses.
9. C
I ses. If v1, v2, v3 are in A.P. then
i hc
= +eV ....(1)
λ 1
P 1
I
4 r 2
hc
= +eV ....(2)
λ 2
2
5. B
Ephoton = 6 ev hc
Max KE = 4ev =+eV ....(3)
λ 3
3
= Ephoton - Kmax
= 6 - 4 = 2v After solving (1), (2) and (3) we get
then stopping Potential is 4v.
21 3
2 which are in H.P.
1 3
6. C
12400 eV)
(
E=
(
λ in Å)
IAt λ
No. of Photon=
hc
www.motion.ac.in
246 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
10. B 15. C
KEmax = 2ev
Ephoton = 5ev hc
0
0 = 5ev - 2ev = 3ev
Now no current when
1 4.5 2
Ephoton = 6ev 2.3 1
i.e. KEmax < 3ev 2
11. C 12400
Here h eV 10eV
They have same K.E. 1240
h W = 10 – 8 = 2 eV
λ=
2m K.E. So, 0 = Threshold wavelength
mp > me and qp=qe
12400
Å 6200Å
1 2eV
p<e as
m
17. A
12. A
KE = 100+50 = 150eV 12375
1 Å 1000Å
v = 150volt E1 (eV)
150 E1 = 12.375 eV
λ=
V
12375 12375
Similarly, (Å) eV 2000 6.1875eV
1Å 2
18. C
Ek hc
E= – 0
v hc
2E = 0
According to Einstein's photoelectric equa- '
tion, (KE)max = hv –0 . Comparing with the
straight line equation y = mx + c, we find hc
Solving '
that the slope of the graph is h. Clearly, the E hc
slope is the same for all metlas and is inde-
pendent of the intensity of the ratiation.
19. B 22. C
1 1 1 hc
mv12 hf1 – 0 E Rcz 2 2 2
2
n1 n2
and
1 C
Shortest
mv22 hf2 – 0
2 D
longest
Subtracting, we get
1 23. C
m(v12 – v22 ) h(f1 – f2 )
2 2.18 1018
I.E.
n2
2 2 2h
v1 – v2 (f1 – f2 )
m
2.18 1018
9
20. C = 2.42 × 10-19 J
hc
E 0 24. A
n 1 3 n 1 3 1 10
hc 2
2E 0
'
(n-2) (n+1) = 20
n2 - 3n - 18 = 0
' E 0 '
Dividing, we get 2E or <1 n=6
0
25. D
’< or >’
2 2
0.529 n 1 n 2 0.529 n 1
' 1 E 0
Also,
2
2n 1 n 2 1 2n
E 0
2 n 0, 4
' 1 26. D
or or ’>
2 2
v 2 z 2 /n2 . z z 3 1
It folows from Eqs. (i) and (ii) that a= 4 4
R n2 n n
16 : 81
> ’>
2
27. B
21. B
v z/n z 2 1
f=
nh 2 r n2 /z n3 n3
J = mvr =
2 As per queestion
1 1 1 1
n=3 f1 f2 ;
27 n13 27 n32
1
K.E. = - T.E. = 13.6 × n = 3n2
9
= 1.51ev
www.motion.ac.in
248 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
29. A 0
m0 = 4mf + mf f =
5
z2 1
E 13.6 13.6 2 1 2
n2 2 Kinetic energy = (5m) 0
= 3.4 ev 2 25
30. B 1 1 m 2 K
= 0 =
5 2 5
1 1
eV = hc Now, for minimum value of K so that the
0
electron excite to first excited state of H
1 atom and He+ ion.
eV 1
hc
3 2 0 4K 51 5
= 51 eV or K = or K = 63.75 eV
Dividing Eq. (i) and (ii), we get 0 = 4. 5 4
31. A
34. B
If K.E.<13.6ev
ΔE =0,10.2,12.09 .......13.6ev The energy taken by hydroge n atom
corresponds to its transition from n = 1 to n
Collision must be elastic
= 3 state.
E (given to hydrogen atom)
32. A
T.E.=P.E. + K.E. 1 8
13.6 1 13.6 12.1 eV
Existed 9 9
Gnd
E 35. A
So both P.E. & K.E. For a collision of neutron with hydrogen atom
in ground state to be inelastic (partial or
complete), the minimum KE of striking neutron
33. A
must be 20.4 eV. [This condition is derived in
Here, energy loss during the collision is used
theory.]
to excite the atom or ion.
As the energy of the given incident neutron
Now, according to quantum mechanics loss
is less than 2.4 eV, the collision must be
in energy (E) for H atom
elastic.
{0, 10.2 eV, 12.09 eV, ...., 13.06 eV}
For He_ ion : {0, 40.8 eV, 48.36 eV,...., 54.5
36. C
eV}
As the collision is inelastic, it means a part
to excite the hydrogen atom and He+ ion in
of kinetic energy is transformed into some
first excited state, minimum energy = 40.8 +
other form due to collision. In this case, the
10.2 = 51 eV
kinetic energy of incident electron can be
Now, according to newtonion mechanics, absorbed by H atom and it can absorb only
minimum loss = 0 (for elastic collision). 10.2 eV out of 11.2 eV, so that it can reach
Maximum loss will be when there is perfectly to 1st excited state and the electron leaves
inelastic collision. ith remaining energy, i.e., 1.0 eV
Now, let mass of H atom = m, then mass of
37. B 2 2
v1 v2 v1 v2 4v1 v2
1 3
E = R ch × 1 2 = R × hc 2 E
2 4 v1 v2 v2 4
m
Momentum of photon emitted is, As v1 – v2 must be real, therefore
E 3R h E
p= = v2 4 0
c 4 m
Recoiling speed of hydrogen atom is given by
1
= P/m. where m is the mass of hydrogeon or mv2 2E
2
atom.
The minimum energy that can be absorbed
3R h 3 1.1 107 6.63 10 34 by hydrogen atom in ground state to go into
= =
4m 4 1.67 10 27 excited state is 10.2. eV.
= 3.3 ms–1 Therefore,
1
38. C mv2min 2 10.2 eV
2
1 = 20.4 eV
E = R hc 1
25
Momentum of photon emitted is 40. B
E 24 1 1
p= = R h 25 E = 13.6 2 2
c 1 6
Recoil momentum of H atom will also be p. = 13.22 eV
m = p E
p=
7
(1.097 10 )(6.626 10 34
)24 c
p
= =
m (25)(1.67 1027 )
E 13.22 1.6 10 –19
= 4.178 ms–1 v= =
mC 1.67 10 – 27 3 108
= 4.2 m/s
39. B
Let v = speed of neutron before collision,
41. C
v1= speed of neutron after collision,
hc hc
v2 = speed of proton or hydrogen atom E
E
after collision
p q
and E = energy of excitation
EP EQ
For conservation of linear momentum,
EK EK
mv = mv1 + mv2 ...(i)
So Q
K
Fron conservation of energy,
P
K
1 1 1
mv2 mv12 mv22 E ....(ii)
2 2 2
From Eq. (i), 42. C
www.motion.ac.in
250 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
44. C
200 5 78
= 26 z = 27
3 3 33 3
L
1 2 49. A
K
E1 + E3 = E2 13.6Z2
En eV
hk+ hLhk n2
kkL
k
En – eV
n2
45. B
When ever the energy of photon is doubled k k k
E1 – , E2 – , E4 –
then work function increases must more than 1 4 16
by 2 times.
k k
Now, E2 – E1 – – –
4 1
46. C
Energy of photon is given by mc2. Now, the k 3k
k–
maximum energy of photon is equal to the 4 4
maximum energy of electrons = eV
eV k k
Hence, mc2 = eV m = E4 – E2 – – –
c2 16 4
1.6 1019 18 103
= 3.2×10-32 kg
(3 10 )2 k k 3k
–
4 16 16
47. D Clearly, E2 – E1 > E4 – E2
1 2 1 1
Using R(z 1) n2 n2 50. B
2 1
48. A 1 3R
(z 1)2
4
1 3R
(z 1)2 From given information, (–2)=3(–1)
4
Solving above equation, we get Z = 29
4 4
(z-1)=
3R 3 1.1 107 1.8 1010
1. D
2hc 2hc
K2 K2
1 1
hc
= +K
λ Now eq. (1) - eq. (2)
4hc 4 4K 2K1 K2 0
= + ..............(1)
3λ 3 3
K2 2K1
4hc ' 4hc '
= + K = +K ......(2)
3λ 3λ K2 K2
K1 K1
equation (2)-equation (1) 2 2 2
' 4 4
K - K- + =0 5. C
3 3
' 4 4K eV1
K = K+ > V 0 f f0
3 3 3 f1 f0
eV1 f0
2. C = or f0 h
f0 f1
4. C 2 E2e v2
4E2 Eph
or 2e 2 or E2 4c2
hc 2hc v c ph
K1 2 2K1
1 1
Ee v
or
Eph 2c
www.motion.ac.in
252 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
8. C 12. D
Electric field may increase or decrease the
h
speed of electron
2mqV
h h
mV = constant As P mv
1837 V’ = 1×V
magnetic field will on change the speed of
V the particle.
or V’ = volt
1837
so 1 2 or 1 2
9. B
13. D
Since the stopping potential depends on the
For equilibrium, force exerted by the light
fequency and not on the ntensity and the
beam should balance the weight of plate.
source is ame, the stopping potential remains
unaffected. The saturation current depends Fphoton mg
on the intensity of incident light on the
cahtode of the photocell which in turn de- IA P
pends on the distance of the source from Fphoton , where power P = IA
c c
cathod. The intensity of light is inversely pro-
portional to the square of the distance be- P
10 103 10
tween the ight source and photocell. c
Intensity, I 1/r2 and saturation current I
(Intensity) P 3 107 W
1
Saturation current 14. C
r2
Energy of one photon E = hc/
2
(Saturation current)final rinitial
If power of source is P, the number of photons
(Saturation current)initial r 2
final
incident on the metallic surface
P P
0.2 0.2
Saturation current 18 =2 mA E hc
0.6 0.6
Momentum of incident photons =h/l
Change in momentum due to reflection=2h/
10. C
Total momentum imparted to the surface per
Applying conservation of linear momentum :
second is
Initial momentum = Final momentum
0 = m1v1 – m2v2 m1v1 = m2v2 2h P 2P
hc c
1 h / m1 v1
Now, 1
2 h / m2 v2 Force 2P 2P
Pressure = A
Area c cA
11. D
The wavelength of a particle of momentum 2 5 103
p is 3.33 105 N m–2
3 108 106
= 2.9 × 10–11 m.
15. B 18. B
For photon : E = hv Total no. of oribits are (n+1)
E
hc n n 1
or No. of spectral lines =
2
2 2
1 mp vp 19. B
E p 2mE
2 m
IInd excited state
hv = 1.89
From de Broglie equation, Ist excited state
Ground state
h
P
1
1.89 5
Z 0.185
h h 10.2 27
1 ....(ii) hc hc
p 2mE 1.89 10.2
1 2
1 10.2
Now 5.39
h h
2 1.89
1 E–1/2
p 2mE
h h P2 2
P
16. D p P2 1
1 1 hc P1 1.89 5
ΔE=Rcz 2 2 - 2 =
n1 n2 λ P2 10.2 27
1 2
z
λ
For z = 3 Li2 20. B
λ will be minimum
Z2 1
T .E . 13.6 3.4 13.6
n2 n2
17. C
13.6
n2 n2 4 n2
r 3.4
z
1 K.E. T .E. 3.4 P2 2m 3.4(ev)
f 2 & T n3
n
T1 n13 1 2 9.1 1031 3.4 1.6 1013
T2 n32 23
1:8 P 1024
h 6.67 1034
6.6 1010 m
p 1024
www.motion.ac.in
254 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
21. A
dP I
In ultra violet region lyman series is present dt dA( 1) cos2
Photons c
dP I
25.69 T .E. dt dA( 1) cos2
Surface c
Total Energy 23.8 T .E.
increaseas n increases 13.6 T .E. Hence, pressure exerted on surface,
Differente B / w two shell is cons tan t
dF I
P dA( 1) cos2
dA c
23. C On substituting values, we get P = 0.5 N cm-2.
P2 h2
E
2m 2m2 26. A
Imagine the sphere to be made of thin circular
(6.62 1034 )2 rings of radius r, thickness ds = R dq and
2 4 1.67 1027 (0.1 1010 )2 subtending an angle of at the center.
Momentum per second of incident photons,
1
eV
1.6 1019 dP I
dt dA cos2
incident c
43.82 1068
2.05eV Since surface of mirror is considered to be
21.376 1068
ideal, i.e., reflection coefficient is unity,
photons suffer momentum change in normal
24. C direction only.
for largest warelength of Balmer series
dP 2l
n=3 to n=2 dt dA cos2
photon c
So Electron will jump from ground state
to n=3
dP 2l 2
Energy Required = 13.6 - 1.51 dFn c dA cos
dt ball
= 12.1ev
This force may be resolved into horizontal
and vertical components. The verti cal
25. D component dFn sin is cancelled because
Momentum corresponding to incident protons every element on the upper half has a
normal to the surface. symmetrically placed element in the lower
half. So, resultant force on the ball.
dP I
dt dA cos2
incident c 2l 3
F= dF n cos c dA cos
Since reflection coefficient is , so the
dA = (2R sin ) R d
momentum of the reflected photons per
second normal to surface, /2 I
F= 4 R 2 cos3 sin d
0 c
dP I
dt dA cos2
reflected c 4R 2I / 2 3 R 2I
cos sin d
c 0 c
Hence, rate of change of momentum of the
On subsitituting values, we get F = 0.8 N.
photons,
27. D
hc
From conservation of linear momentum, both Shortest X-ray wavelength, 2 =
Ve
the particles will have equal and opposite
momentum. The de Broglie wavelength is
1 Ve 1 V e
given by
2 c 2mVe c 2 m
h
1/2 = 1
p 104
1.8 1011
2 1
8
0.1
3 10 10
28. B
Let V = speed of neutron before collision or 1 : 2 = 1 : 10
V1 = speed of neutron after collision
V2 = speed of hydrogen atom after collision 30. C
E = energy of excitation The characteristic X-ray depends on the
from conservation of momentum material used.
1 1 1 1 1 1
mV2 = mV12 + mV22 + E …(2) Z2R 2 2
2 2 2 n
1 n2
4E
(V1 – V2)2=(V1+V2)2– 4V1 V2 = V2 – 4
m z
3 R
As V1 – V2 must be real
= 39.9 40
E
V2 – 4 0
m
32. C
1
mV2 2E hc
2 min
eVmax
1 2
mVmin = 2 × 10.2 = 20.4 eV
2
33. B
29. A
Use Moseley’s law
For the incident electron.
1 34. B
mv2 Ve
2
12400
p2 = 2meV E 18700 eV Potential 18.7 KV
0.663
de Broglie wavelength of incident election,
1227 0
Kv 0.01A
h h v
1 =
p 2mVe
www.motion.ac.in
256 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
1. A,C 7. A, D
hv T1 n13
ev 0 hv v0 n1 2n2 Check options
e T2 n23
i.e. v0 depends on frequency of incident light
and work function (emitter property)
8. A,C,D
If same energy released in y-direction then
2. B,C
same of the incident wavelength is missing
Photocurrent depends no. of photons in A.
following on collector-plate only.
Ratio M.W. Infrared Visible Regions.
3. A,B,C U.V. X-Ray f
Exi st ence of cut-off freq ue nc y and B will contain same visible and infrared light.
photoemissi on takes place even when
internsity is low.
9. A,C,D
5. A,B If K 20.4 ev
E 0,10.2ev,12.09ev
6. A,C,D E 0, 7ev ,
loss 0
13.6 z 2
122.4 z2 9 z 3
1
so elastic collision
if (K.E.) > 20.4ev
Its energy level are
-30.6 ev then if loss = 0 then elastic
91.8 ev & otherwise inelastic collision
If e- have K.E. energy
-122.4 ev
= 125 ev
11. A,B,D
The energy of each photon is hc/, so that
then energy of average electron the number of photons released per unit time
= 125 - 122.4 = 2.6ev is W/(hc/). These photons are spread out
in all directions over an area 4a2, so that
the ‘share’ of an area S is a fraction S/4a2
of the total number of photons emitted.
The maxi mum energy of em i t te d
photoelectrons is
13. A,D
hc 1
Emax = hc–= – = (hc--) Minimum wavelength detreases.
Intensity Increases.
The stopping potential is given by
eVs = Emax
14. A,B
E 1
Hence, Vs = max (hc ) 12400
e e min min 0.62 Å min 62pm
20000
Hence, choice (c) is incorrect.
12 & 45 pm will be absent
For photoemission to be possible, we have
hc > .
15. A,B,C
hc hc
Hence, or
16. B,C
Thus, the permitted range of values of is Lyman series lies in the ultraviolet region,
Balmer series in visible region, and Paschen
hc
0 series in infrared region.
C. R > Y >B > V
Hence, the correct choices are (a), (b), and
(d).
12. A,B,C
In ground frame :
mx
Kinetic energy : Kx = (– Q) 1 m
x
Kx > (–Q)
In center of mass frame :
Kinetic energy : (Kx) = (– Q)
In nuclear reactions linear momentum is
conserved.
www.motion.ac.in
258 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
2. (a) 2.25 eV (b) 4.2 eV (c) 2.0 eV, 0.5 eV 1.8 1019
no of e emitted 101
5 109
4.25 A Ta ...............(1)
4.7 B Tb .................(2) i = 0.36 × 109 × 1.6 × 10-19
Tb (Ta 1.5)...............(3)
i 5.76 10 11 A
h
a ...............(4)
2 Me Ta
6. 940.96 V
h
b ...............(5) Here, l = 0.4 Å = 0.4 × 10–10 m
2 Me Tb
Let V be the required voltage. Then,
By 4 5
h
given b 2a 2meV
a 12.27
4 a 4 b or in Å
b V
by (3)
12.27
0.4
1 V
b ev & a 4 b
2
or V 30.675
by (1) & (2)
or V = (30.675)2 = 940.96 V
A 2.25ev
A 4.2ev
7. Photon
Let be the de Broglie wavelength of the
3. 0.6 Volt, 2.0 mA
electron and the photon. If ma dn v are the
i nef mass and velocity of the electron, then de
I 1 Broglie wavelenght of the electron
sn 2
4 r hf
h
i1 r22
mv
i 2 r12
The photon has got zero rest mass. Therefore,
2
18 mA 0.6 energy of the photon is totally kinetic in
2
i2 0.6 nature. Since the wavelength of the photon
i 2 2 mA is same as that of the electron, the kinetic
energy of the photon having wavelength ,
I same so V0 will remain same.
as l ar ge a s th at of th e op ti ca l
microscrope. 12. 4.26 m/s, 13.2 eV
Here, V = 50 kV. Therefore, energy of
electrons, 13.6
n6 E5 0.38ev
E = 50 keV = 50 × 103 × 1.6 × 10–19 36
n 1 E1 13.6
= 8.0 × 10–15
E 13.2ev
Now,
h 13.2
V
2me mc
Taking m = 9.1 × 10–31 kg, we have
13. 7 : 36
6.62 1034
For Balmer series
2 9.1 1031 8.0 1015
n 5 2
6.62 1034 1 1 1
5.485 1012 m Rz 2 2 2
1.207 1022 1 2 5
The resolving power of microscope is inversely
14. 18/5R
proportional to the wavelength of the
radiation used. Since wavelength of the Em
yellow light is 5990 Å, i.e., 5.99 × 10-7 m,
power of electron microscope is 105 times as 1 1 1
Rz 2 2 2
large as that of the optical microscrope. nc n13
9. –h/e Et2
1 1 1
2R 5 2 2
2 3
h h 18
mv 1 eE 2 5R
2meE t
2 m
h
eEt
www.motion.ac.in
260 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
17. Z= 2&n=5
E1 E1
Maximum energy is liberated from transition E4 E2
16 4
En 1 and minimum energy for En En–1.
Hence, 3
2.7eV E1
16
E1
E1 52.224 eV
n2 Thus, the ionization energy of the given atom
is 14.4 eV.
E1 E1 c. Maximum energy of the emitted photon is
2
1.224 eV
n n 12 for t he e l e ct ron transi ti on n = 4 t o
n = 1, i.e.,
Solving the above equationss simultaneously,
we get E1 15
E4 E1 E1 E1
E1 = –54.4 eV and n = 5 16 16
22. 6210 eV
15
14.4 13.5 eV
16 12420
EK 6210ev
Thus, the maximum energy of the emitted 2
photon is 13.5 eV. Minimum energy of the
12420
emitted photon corresponds to the transition EK 12420ev
1
n = 4 to n = 3, i.e.
for L transition
E E 7
E4 E3 1 1 E1 (from n=3 to n=2)
16 9 144
Energy diff. = 6210 ev.
7
14.4 0.7 eV 23. during combination = 3.365 eV; after
144
combinat ion = 3.88 eV ( 5 3) & 2.63 eV
(4 3)
19. One electron having kinetic energy nearly
11.6 eV 1240
E 3.1ev
Total energy received by the atom will be 400
25.2 eV. 13.6 eV energy is needed to remove W .f . 1.9 ev
the electron from the attraction of the (KE )m 1.2 ev
nucleus. Rest of the energy will be almost z2
13.6
available in the form of KE of electron. n2
4
13.6 2.176 ev
20. E1 < E2 25
Photon Energy 2.17 1.2
3.37 ev
E1
H atom 24. 62.5 × 10–12, 192.5 × 10–12
Case I hc hc
E
1 2
E2
H atom
2 1 130 x 1012 m
Case II
EK EK EL L
hfK hfK hfL
K
fK fK fL L
www.motion.ac.in
262 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
hc hc
1011 Energy of photon E = E
No. of Photo electron = 105 sec1 0.5 10 – 9
106
(C) Due to in Potential of the sphere the spacecraft will acquire momentum in the
opposite direction according to law of con-
Potential becomes 2V0. Energy required is 2
servation of momentum.
eV extra the n
No. of photons per sec. from laser = n.
e– stops.
Then from energy considerations,
kq
(D) 2V
r c
0.5 × 10–3 = nh
9 x 109 x q
Z n = (0.5 × 10–3)/(ch)
8 x 10 3
Rate of change of momentum of spacecraft
mv 2
Hence, Bqv = or mv = qBr 1 1 1
r 1.097 10 7 z 2
2 3
The de Broglie wavelength
12400 12400
h h 68 = 182.35 Å
= = 68
mv qBr
1010 1 1
particle q p rp 1.097 10 7 z 2
182.35 4 9
proton = q r
103 36
r q z 2 z2 = 36 z = 6
200 5
Since r = 1 and qp = 2
p
z
v 2.18 10 6 13.08 10 6 m / s
1 n
p = 2
1 1
K.E. = mv 2 9.1 10 – 31 171.08 10 21
2 2
5. 3.1 × 106 m/s K.E. = 778 × 10–19
First line of lyman series means n2 = 2, Ionisation energy = (13.6) (z)2 = 13.6 × 36
n1 = 1 eV = 489.6 eV
1 1 1 12400
Rz 2 2 2 ' 25.28 Å
1 2 489.6
1 1
1.097 10 7 2 2 1
4
www.motion.ac.in
264 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
v 95 x 4
6.36 eV
5
The same way for 48.36 eV
n He + v1
8. n=2
r n2
v2
5.3 10 –11 1
–11 = n 2
21.2 10
n2 = 4 , n = 2
v0
4M v1 KE TE 3.4 ev
m
p2
3.4 ev
2m
p 10 24
v
6.67 10 34
h
p 1024
(b) 40.8 x 10 1019 6.634 x 1034 x f 6.6 1010 m
9.846 x 1015 Hz
10. 0.61 Å
19 34
48.36 x1.6 10 6.634 x10
12400
min
f 11.6 x10 Hz 15 20 103
min 0.62 Å
7.56 x 1.6 x 10-19 = 6.634 x 10-34
(a)
V V ...(1)
4
4mv mv
V
V ....(2)
4
1 1 v2 3K
mv20 4m 0 48.75
2 2 164 4
1. C
1 1
E(21) Rhc 2 0.75 Rhc
h (1) (2 )2
We know
mv
1 1
1 (mv)2 E(13) Rhc 2 0.9 Rhc
and K mv2 (3) (1)2
2 2m
Thus, III transition gives most energy. I tran-
mv 2mK
sition represents the absorption of energy.
h 1
Thus, 4. B
2mK K
According to the photoelectric effect in a
photocell, if a light of wavelength is incident
1 K1 K1
(K 2 2K1 ) on a cathode, then electrons are emitted,
2 K2 2K1
which constitute the photoelectric current.
Photocel l i s based on the principle of
1 1 1 photoelectric effect. As the wavelength of
or or 2
2 2 2 light changes, there is no change in number
of electrons emitted and hence, no change
in current (Plate current of photocell). Thus,
2. B the two wavelength of incident light and plate
current are independent to each other.
I2 (r1 )2 1
as I 2 Plate current depends on intensity of light
I1 (r2 )2 r
used.
Note : Here no option is matching.
I2 (1)2
I1 1 2
5. B
2
The photoelectric effect is an instantaneous
I2 = 4I1 phenomenon (experimentally proved). It takes
Now, since number of electrons emitted per approximate time of the order of 10-10 s.
second is directly proportional to intensity,
so num be r of e l e ct rons e mi tt ed b y 6. A
photocathode would increase by a factor of hv0 =6.2 eV, eVo = 5 eV
4. From Einstein's photoelectric equation
hv = hv0 +eV0 = 6.2 + 5 = 11.2 eV
3. A
hc
11.2 eV
1 1
E Rhc 2 2
n1 n2
0
hc
or 1108 .9 A
11.2
1 1
E(43) Rhc 2 2 0.05Rhc Which belongs to ultra - violet region.
3 4
1 1
E(42) Rhc 2 2 0.2Rhc
2 4
www.motion.ac.in
266 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
7. B 11. B
Since, nuclear target is heavy, it can be Expression is given by 2 d cos i = ndB.
assumed, safely that it will remain stationary
and will not move due to the Coulombic 12. D
interaction force.
As diffraction pattern has to be wider than
At distance of closest approach, relative slit width, so (d) is the correct option.
velocity of two particles is v.
Here, target is considered as stationary, so
13. B
–particles comes to rest instantaneously at
distance be closest approach. Let required mv 2 k
di stance be r, then from work–energy given
rn rn
theorem,
nh
mv2 1 Ze 2e mvrn from Bohr's theory.
0 2
2 40 r
on solving, rn n and Tn is independent of n.
1
r
m
14. B
1
or r or r Ze2 1
v2 mv2 eVo 1.68 eV
2
8. D hc 1240 ev nm
hv 3.1 eV
400 nm
The momentum of the photon
3.1 eV = W0 + 1.6 eV
h hv
P W0 = 1.42 eV
c
15. D
9. C
Emission spectrum would rises when electron 1 1
makes a jump from higher energy levels to IR corresponds to least value of 2 2 i.e.,,
lower energy level, n1 n2
Frequency of emitted photon is proportional from Paschen, Bracket and Pfund series. Thus
to change in energy of two energy levels, ie, the transition corresponds to 53
1 1
v RcZ2 2 2 16. A
n
1 n2
4 x 103 = 1020 x hf
4 x 103
10. B f 20
10 x 6.023 x 1034
For constructive interference,
f 6.64 x 1016 Hz
h
2d cos i = n
2meV The obtained frequency lies in the band of
X-rays.
On substituting values, we get,
V 50 volt
17. D 21. C
Since, the frequency of ultraviolet light is Davissi on and Germer experimentall y
less than the frequency of X–rays, the energy established wave nature of electron by
of each incident photon will be more for X– ob se rv i ng di ffract i on patt ern whi l e
rays bombarding electrons on Ni crytal.
KEphotoelectron = hv –
Stopping potential is to stop the fastest 22. D
photoelectron In emission spectrum number of bright lines
is given by
hv
V0
e e n(n 1) 4(4 1)
6
2 2
So, KEmax and V0 both increases. But KE
ranges from zero to KEmax, because of loss of
energy due to subsequent collisions before 23. D
getting ejected and not due to range of Rotational kinetic energy of the two body sys-
frequencies in the incident light. tem rotating about their centre of mass is
1 2 2
18. C RKE r ,
2
Kmax = eVo h(v v o )
m1m2
If V' = 2v where m m = reduced mass
1 2
1 1 24. B
13.6(3)2 2 2
1 3 = 108.8 eV
1
Energy
20. D
25. B
h h
de- Broglie wavelength ,
mv P 1
Energy
n2
Where P = momentum
By conservation of momentum 1 1
h 2
2
or P1 P2 (n 1) n
P1 P2 0
1 2 n2 (n 1)2 2n 1
h 2 2
(n 1) (n) n (n 1)2
2
2n 1
h
n (n)2
2
n3
www.motion.ac.in
268 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
1 1 1 1
1 (1)2
, 2 (1)2
, 3 (2)2
, 4 (3)
2
30. D
1 hc
1 1 mv2 = – ....(1)
1 : 2 : 3 : 4 = 1 : 1 : : 2
4 9
1 4 hc
mv’2 = – ....(2)
2 3
27. D
mv hc 1
from eqn. (1) = mv2 +
r= 2
qB
on putting this equ. (2)
qBr 1.6 1019 3 104 10 103
v= = 1 4 1
m 9.1 1031 2
mv’2 = 2 mv –
2 3
= 5.27 × 105
KEmax = 1/2 mv2
4
= 1/2 × 9.1 × 10–31 × (5.27 × 105)2 v’ > v
3
126.36 1021
=
1.6 1019 31. (C)
2m2u2 u1(m1 m2 )
= 78.975 × 10–2 v1 = m1 m2
= 0.78 eV
m
1 0 u m
1 2 u
E = 13.6 2 2 v1 = =
3 3
n1 n2 m
2
1 1 2mu
= 13.6 4 9 4u
v2 = 3 m =
2 3
= 1.88 ev
1.88 = 0.78 + mu
pA =
3
= 1.1 eV
m 4u 2mu
pB = . =
2 3 3
28. C
pA 1
ETotal
Z2
= –13.6 eV 2 pB = 2
n
A 2
KE = |ETotal |
B = 1
PE = 2 Etotal
1. C
c 1 1
v Rc(Z 1)2 2 2
1 1 2
For Ka v (z – 1) (z 1)
3
= 1.1 × 107 × 3 × 108 × (26 – 1)2
1 4
or ...(i),
(z 1)2
3
= 1.1 × 3 × 625 × × 1015
1 4
4 ...(ii)
(z'1)2 = 9.9 × 625 × 25 × 1013
= 154875 × 1012 Hz
2
1 (z'1) z'1 1
= 2z – 2
4 (z 1)2 z 1 2 5. A,C
= z – 1 2z' – 2 = 11 – 1 = 10 z = 6 Stopping potential is given by
2. A
hc 1 1 1 1
First photon will excite the atom to I excited v 12400
e 0
0
state, which when returning to ground state
will emit a photon of energy 10.2 eV second = wavelength in Å
photon will ionize the atom (13.6 eV will be 0 = Threshold value of wavelength for a
used up in this process). The extra energy particular metal.
(=15 – 13.6 = 1.4 eV) will be carried by
electron as its K.E. So a photon of energy
13.6 eV and an electron of energy 1.4 eV will 6. n = 24
be emitted. Compare the wavelength of the transition
from (n + 1)th to first n = 1 of the ion to the
de-broglie wavelength in its first orbit.
3. 2
For 0 x 1, KE = 2E0 – E0 = E0 7. B
for x > 1, KE = 2E0 both statements are correct but statement
(2) is not correct explanation of statement
1 h / P1 P KE2 2E0 (1).
2 2
2 h / P2 P1 KE1 E0 Energy of characterstic X-ray depends on
the difference in energy levels.
4. v = 1.546 × 1018 Hz
8. A
(a) Using R = R0 (A)1/3
1/3 h p2 h2
1/3 A p= K.E. = =
(14) 2m 2m2
4
If entire K.E. of electron is converted into
A = 14 × 4 = 56 photon then
Z = A – N = 56 – 30 Z = 26
h2 hc 2mc2
0
1 2 1 1 2m 2
0 h
(b) R(Z 1) 2 2
1 2
www.motion.ac.in
270 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
9. B
900
The series in uv region is Lyman series. E2 = = 1.77 eV
11R
Longest wavelength corresponds to minimum
energy which occurs in transition from n = 2 From energy level diagram of He+ atom, we
to n = 1. can see that in transition from n = 4 to n =
3, energy of photon released will lie between
1 /R E1 and E2.
122 ....(1)
1 1 E43 = – 3.4 – (–6.04)
12 22 = 2.64 eV
The smallest wavelength in the infrared region Wavelength of photon corresponding to this
corresponds to maximum energy of Paschen energy,
series
12375
= Å = 4687.5 Å
264
1 /R
1 1 ....(2) = 4.68 × 10–7 m
2
3
13. A
from (1) and (2) = 823.5 nm.
Kinetic energy, K Z2
10. B KH 2
1 1
KHe = 2 = 4
hc
cutoff =
ev
(independent of atomic number) 14. A
n 2a
11. C a
2 n
n=2 -3.4 eV
h
n=1 -13.6 eV de Broglie
H atom p
n=4 -3.4 eV
2a h nh
p
n=3 -6.04 eV n p 2a
n=2 -13.6 eV
p2 n 2h 2
E 2
n=1 -54.4 eV 2m 8a m
He + Z = 2
15. B
12. C
Visible light lies in the range, 1 = 4000 Å to h2
E
2 = 7000 Å. Energy of photons corresponding 8a 2 m
to these wavelengths (in eV) would be :
(6.6 10 34 ) 2
12375 = = 8 meV
E1 = = 3.09 eV, and 8 (6.6 109 ) 2 10 30 1.6 10 19
4000
16. D 22. A
nh 1 1
mv 2 1
2a Given Rz 2 2
1 n1 n2
nh
or v = vn 1 1 1 36
2am R(1)2 R =
6561 4 9 6561 5
17. A
1 1 1
Wavelength have energies 2.25 eV, 2.75 eV, Now R(2)2
2 4 16
3.5 eV.
In P, all cause emission, in q, only last two 16 4 6561 5
16 4
& in r, only last IP > Iq > I r . 2 = =
R 4 12 36 4 12
2 1215 Å
18. 3
h p m q 23. 7
= 8 3
2mv mp qp w.f = 4.7 eV
hc
E= = 6.2 eV
19. D
20. B KQ 9 109 Q
1.5 = 1.5
2 2
R 1 10 2
LF L
i hf
2I 2I 1.5
Q= 10 11 No. of e–
9
h
[4 1] f
4 2 2 I 1.5 10 11 150
= 19 = 107
9 1.6 10 9 16
I = 1.87 × 10–46 kgm2
Z=7
21. C
Icm = Ic + I0 24. 7
r p2 9 109 e 120e
2m 10 10 15
2 2
4r 3r 1.87 10 –46
12 16 h
7 7 1.63 10 – 27
& (from debroglie)
p
r = 1.3 × 10–10
solving = 7 x 10-15 = 7 fm
www.motion.ac.in
272 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
25. B 28. A
t = 100 × 10–9 s, P = 30 × 10–3 W,
12400
C=C× 108 m s–1 E1 = =5eV
2480
Momentum
12400
Pt 30 103 1000 10 9 E2 = = 4eV
3100
= =
C 3 108
5 = + 4k .....(1)
= 1.0 × 10–17 kg ms–1 4=+k .....(2)
On solving
26. 1
11
Slope is constant for all metals = = 3.66 = 3.7 eV
3
27. AC
29. B
nh By Mosley’s Law :
L=
2
f = a (z – 1)
n=3
c
n2 As v = f f =
R = a0
Z
Inverse relation and hence :
9
4.5 a0 = a0 1
Z (Z 1)2
Z = 2.
2
1 1 1 Z2 1 1 (42 1)2
hc
= Rhc × 2 2 = 0 =
(24 1)2
= 2.14
n1 n2 2 Z1 1
(1 3 transition)
30. B
1 1
= R 1 C = 3 × 108 m/s
1 9
e = 1.6 × 10–19 C
32R 9 in m
= 1 =
9 32R E = + eV
(1 2 transition) hc
eV1
1
1 1 1
= R 1 × 4 2 = R
2 4 3 hc
eV2
(2 3 transition) 2
1 1 1 1 1 1
= R 4 9 × 4 2 = R hc eV1 eV2
3 3 1 2
1 20R 9 1 1
= = h 3 108 6
6
3 36 5R 0.3 10 0.4 10
= 1.3×10–19 [2 – 1]
1 2n
0.4 10 0.3 10 6 6 n2 1 2n
h 3 108
0.3 0.4 1012
1 2n
= 1.6 × 10–19 n2 1 2n n2 1 2n
L n n 1 1
Relative change =
L n n
31. A,B,D
orbital :
32. 6
r Wavelength = 970 Å
& relative change
r
n=4 –0.85
n2 n=3 –1.51
rn 0.529
Z
n=2 –3.4
12.75
n 12 n2
n=1 –13.6
n2
n2 1 2n n2 12375
= 12.75 eV
n2 970
1 1 33. C
2
n2
n1 eV
hc
1 ph
n2
hc
v
n2 n2 1 2n n2 phe e
2
n2 n 1 1
h
e
1 2n 2mE
n 12
h
e
2meV
www.motion.ac.in
274 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
1. A
4 3 1 /3 15
All neutrons attract each other with the same V 3 R ,R R 0 A ,R 0 1.25 10
strong nuclear force. So, the strong nuclear
force holds together three protons and one D = 2×1017 kg m-3
3
neutron Li just as vigourously as it holds 6. C
4
together two protons and two neutrons 1
1 a.m.u. = [mass of one 6c12]
12
4
2 He . Specifically, protons electrostatically For C A 12
repel other protons. This repulsion tries to
7. B
4 A
make a nucleus fly apart. Since He contains X A X 2A Y
2
E2 – 2 E1 = Q
only two protons. The attractive strong
nuclear forces overcome the repulsion of the
8. C
protons. Hence, the nucleus holds together.
4 3B A e
But it Li , the mutual repulsion of the three
3
protons overcomes the strong nucl ear Eb Ea
attractions and the nucleus falls apart (or
e = Ea – 3Eb 3Eb = Ea – e
undergoes radioactive decay into a more
stable nucleus). Therefore, the answer will
9. B
into a more stable nucleus. Therefore, the
Energy = BE of Products – BE of Reactants
answer will be (c).
(8.2 × 110 + 8.2 × 90) – 7.4 × 200
2. A = 160 MeV
Isotopes A and C have same number of pro-
tons. 10. C
Energy released = (80×7+120×8–200×6.5
3. B = 220MeV)
Nuclear forces are charge independent.
11. A
4. B For X : energy = 200 × 7.4 = 1480 MeV
Fast neutrons can be easily slowed down by For A : energy = 110 × 8.2 = 902 MeV
passing them through water. This is because
For B : energy = 80 × 8.1 = 648 MeV
of comparable masses the energy passed by
Energy released=(902+648) – 1480
neutron to water modelcule is high.
= 1550 – 1480 = 70 MeV
5. B
Nuclear density of an atom of mass number A, 12. D
Energy released
27
mass A(1.67 10 ) E = total binding energy of 2He4 – 2 (total
D
volume 4 binding energy of 1H2)
[1.25 1015 A1 / 3 ]3
3 = 4 × 7.0 – 2 (1.1) (2) = 23.6 MeV
13. B 20. D
The gamma photon corresponding to the en-
R 1 No e T1 = N1
ergy difference will be captured so that en-
R 2 No e T2 = N2 ergy on reactant and product side is equal.
(939 + 940 - 1876)
R1 R2 = 3 MeV (Captures)
Atoms decayed N1-N2 = R1 R 2
21. B
14. A
A 50 Mev
As there is no further disintegration of product K.E = 48 MeV
hence decay constant is Zero. ( A 4)
0.693
226 = 206 + 4x
0.693 t
A2 N0 e 4 x=5
4
A1
0.693 0.693
t t 23. A
2e 4 2
A2 As the alpha particle decays, the daughter
nucleus recoils. In such a process, the mo-
1 0.693 mentum conservation holds good.
e–0.693 = = 2e 2 = 2
2 So,
Pa = PD = P
16. C
P2 P2
K = and KD
N0 2M 2MD
N1 N0et = N0e1 =
e
As M D > M ,
so, K > KD.
17. B
19. B
Two smaller nuclei combining to form a larger
nucleus is called a Fusion reaction.
www.motion.ac.in
276 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
1. A 6. B
It is difficult to over come attractive forces Number of atoms in 2 kg fuel
2
2. A =6.02×1026 = 5.12×1024
235
We know that
Fission rate = Number of atoms fissioned in
1
3
one second
R RoA
5.12 1024
Surface area R 2
30 24 60 60
1 2
(R o A 3 )2 R 20 A 3 = 1.975×1018s-1
Each fission gives 185 MeV. Hence, energy
obtained in one second.
3. C
P = 185×1.975×1018MeV s-1
m11 10 mp ( 20 10)mn = 185×1.975×1018 ×1.6×10-19Js-1
A 0 2B0
m12 2m11
5. C 1 2
10. C 12. B
www.motion.ac.in
278 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
5. B,C
2. B,C
Statement (a) is incorrect. The 2He4 nucleus
(B) R 3 A (or the -particle) is exceptionaly stable and
Volume A has a much higher value of BE per ucleon
than that for most other l ight nuclei.
Mass A
Statement (b) is correct but the reason of
Density is independent of mass num-
decrease in binding energy is different for
ber A
the cases of smaller and larger values of A.
1 The reason for the decrease in the BE per
(D) v nucleon for nuclei with large A is that with
n
an increase in the number of protons, the
r n2
Coulomb repulsion increases, On the other
hand, the decrease in the BE per nucleon for
v2 1
4 nuclei surface being less strongly bound that
r n
those in the interior. Statement (c) is also
3. A,C correct. They energy required to remove one
The idea of ‘magic number’ has led to the neutron (i.e., one nucleon) is the same as
shell model and the nuclides with these num- the binding energy per nucleon for a given
ber of protons or neutrons have been com- isotope.
pared with the ‘inert gases’ vis-a-vis stabil- Statement (d) is incorrect. To ensure both
ity in terms of ‘closed shells’. charge and mass number conservation, a pro-
ton must be produced as a by product of the
4. A,B,D reaction:
D2 + 1D2 1T3 + 1P1 + Q
It has been observed that total mass of 1
my
8. ABC Te QQ
me my
By theory
N 1
N/2 ratio becomes
9. C,D Z 1
14
7 N n 73Li +He24+4n+2+
14
7 N n 73Li +4p+4n
www.motion.ac.in
280 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
1. 2 5. 4.0016 u
MeV 2
3. 2.48 × 10–12 m = 24.990432u 24.985839u 2 0.511 2 C
C
E = 2 x 0.5 = 1MeV
= (0.004593)-(931 Mev u )-1.022 MeV
E hc 1.24 x 1012 MeVm
2 = 3.254 Mev
4. 28 MeV
B 1 H2 1.1MeV
A A 0 e t 500 = 600 e t 32
P 32S e v
Ln6 / 5 Ln(6 / 5)
m 2 103 A.M.U
t 40 min
E = 1.862 MeV
ln2 ln2
Half life t1 /2 40 =152 min
ln6 / 5
40 40
14. (A) 19 K 20 Ca e – , 40
19
40
K 18 Ar e ,
10. 4.5 × 1010 y old 40
19 K e – 18
40
Ar
ln 2
(B) 1.3034 MeV, 0.4676 MeV, 1.490 MeV
4.5 x 10 9
(A)
No of U238 atoms = Nu No of Pb206 atoms = Npb
40 40
19 K 20 Ca e – , 40
19
40
K 18 Ar e ,
Nu = Npb Nu= Noe-t
e-t = 1-e-t t = ln2 40
K e – 18
40
Ar
19
t = 4.5 x 109y
(B) 1.3034 MeV, 0.4676 MeV, 1.490 MeV
40 e
40 40 19 K 40
20 Ca 1
11. (i) 19 K 18 Ar 1 e 0 v ,
E = m(931) MeV 1.3034 MeV
(ii) 4.2 × 109 years
40 40
19 K 18 Ar 1e0
15. 5.304 MeV
0.693 m931 MeV E
N N0et
1.4 10 9
particle energy = E - 217 Kev
1 8 et
16. 5.58 MeV
2.079 1.4 109
t ln(8) t
0.693 Use energy conservation
t = 4.2 × 109 years. m( 238 PU )C2 m( 234 U)C 2 m( 4 He)C2 k
l n5
k = m( 238 PU ) m( 234 U) m( 4 He) c 2
12. t
ln 2 = (238.04955u - 234.04095u - 4.002603u)
931MeV
Given R R 0et = 5.58 MeV
u
No of atom dissociated in time t
= 80%
80N0
N0 1 e t 4 5 5 et
100
5 et 1 ln5 t
ln5 ln5
t
ln 2
www.motion.ac.in
282 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
mp m nN2
Now Q K p 1 – K 1 1 1
N' nN1 nN2 e t
m0 m0 e – t
mass of radon m
2. v = ut
AN' A t Ane t .R 2
1 = nN 2 e
TAvg. = NA NA NA
Given that A = 222, n = 4000,
dN T = 3.8 days t = 7.6 days
= fraction of body disintegrate
N
0 .693
in time dt e t e 3.8
5
2.49 ,
dN R2 = 1.2 × 106 sec
dt
N
m = 3.3 g
dm dv
or dt or dt
m v
7. 6.04 × 10 9 yrs
0.2E0 t – (1 e – t ) At the time of observation t = t
6. T
mS m1 140
m2 1
Rate of decay N
A 1 238
1.01
A 2 235
N
m
Rate of formation Number of atoms N =
A
N1 N0 e – 1t
e( 2 – 1 )t ...(ii)
N (1 – e –t ) N2 N0 e – 2 t
Equation (i) & (ii) we have
Number of nuclei formed in time t = t
& Number of nuclei left after time 140
e( 2 – 1 )t
1.01
t= (1 – e – t )
A (2 – 1)t = n (140) – n (1.01)
8 .4 8 .4
N 6.54 1018
0.6931
T 1.7 1010 year
www.motion.ac.in
284 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
1 mv2 1 Ze 2e 1
e t or 8 et 0 r
8 2 4o r m
3 x 0.693 1
or 3 In 2 = t or
or r or r Ze2
15 v2
Half - life period,
0.693 8. C
t1 / 2 x15 5 min n2
3 x 0.693 Emission spectrum would
rises when electron makes
v
a jump from higher
4. C
energy level to lower
The nuclear reaction can be represented as
Frequen cy of e mitt ed n1
7 1 8 A photon
3 Li H Be X
1 4 Z
is proportional to change in energy of two
Applying conservation of atomic number energy levels, i.e.
(charge)
3 1 4 Z Z 0 1 1
v RcZ2 2 2
n1 n2
9. B 16. B
In gamma ray emission the energy is released Conserving the momentum
from nucleus, so that nucleus get stabilised.
M M
0 v1 v 2
2 2
10. B
Binding energy v1 v2 ...(i)
BE = (Mnucleus- Mnucleoun)c = (M0-8MP-9Mn)c
2 2
1 M 2 1 M 2
mc2 . v1 . v2 ...(ii)
2 2 2 2
11. B
0.693 1 M 2
mc2 v1
T1 / 2 (X) (Y) 2
x Y
2mc 2
x v12
or Y Y x M
0.693
So Y will decay faster than X.
2m
v1 c
M
12. B
Statement I is correct and statement II is
wrong can be directly concluded from Binding 17. B
energy/nucleon curve. 1 2
N1 No No No
3 3
13. A
1st reaction is fusion and 4th reaction is fission 2 1
N2 No No No
3 3
14. B n
N1 1
In positive beta decay a proton is transformed n 1
N2 2
into a neutron and a positron is emitted.
www.motion.ac.in
286 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
22. C
1.6750 1027 1.6725 1027 9 1031
T
1.66 1027 A B
N 0 (1 e t )
20. D 0.3
N 0 e t
For damped harmonic motion,
ma = -kx - mbv 1 – e–t = 0.3 e– t
or ma +mbv +kx = 0 1 = 1.3 e–t
Solution to above equation is
1
bt 2
e t
k b 1.3
x A oe 2
sin t; with 2
m 4
1 ln2
Where amplitude drops exponentially with log t = t
1.3 T
time.
b T log1.3
i.e., A A e 2 t=
o
log 2
Average time is that duration when amplitude
drops by 63% i.e., becomes A0/e.
23. A
b
Ao
2
Thus, A A oe hc
e 2E (E)
1
b 2
or 1 or hc
2 b E
1
21. C 4 hc
TA = 20 min TB = 40 min E (E)
3 2
after 80 min
E hc
N0 N N N
NA = = 0 NB = 20 = 0 3 2
24 16 2 4
15 3 hc E
A decayed = N0 B decayed = N0
16 4 2
3
hc E
15 4 5 1
Ratio = × =
16 3 4
1 1
2 3
3 Ke2
decays in two half lives is . 2 15
. KT T 1 10 9
4 r
7. B 13. B
The series in U- V region is lymen series. deut eron de nsi ty = 8.0 × 10 14 c m – 3 ,
Longest wavelength corresponds to minimum confinement time = 9.0 × 10–1 s
energy which occurs in transition from n = 2
to n = 1. 14. 8
1/ R dN
122 ..(i) n n N0 – t
(1/ 12 1/ 22 ) dt
The smallest wavelength in the infrared region 1
corresponds to max. energy of Paschen By Graph = T = nt 1/ 2
2
series.
0.693
1/ R 4.16 = n × n=3
..(ii)
(1/ 32 1/ )
N0 N0
N= n P = 23 P = 8
from (i) & (ii) = 823 nm P 2
www.motion.ac.in
288 - Solution Physics (XII) Topic
15. 1 21. C
(P) Alpha Decay
dN 1
= N 1010 = N 234
dt 10 9 u238 90 Th He24 (2)
92
N = 10 19
(Q) B+ decay
Total mass = 1019 × 10–25 = 10–6 kg
15 15
M = 10–6 × 1000 × 103 = 1 mg 8 O 7 N 1 0
(1)
(R) Fission
16. C
The Kinetic energy is shared by both electron n
(4) 1.5 unstable
239 140 99
and anti neutrino. Hence maximum KE of Pu
57 La 37
94
p
antineutrino will also be nearly 0.8 × 106 eV.
(S) Proton Emission
184
17. D 185 + Proton (3)
83 Bi 82 Pb
The KE of elctron will lie in the range 0 to
0.8 × 106 eV.
22. C
15
18. 4 7 N 7(11H) 8(10 n)
N0 (1 – e–t ) BE(N) = 0.123986 × 931.5 = 115.492959 MeV
Fraction in % = N0 15
8 O 8(11H) 7(10 n)
= (1 – e–t ) = (1 – e–.04 ) 4% BE(O) = 0.12019×931.5 = 111.956985 MeV
BE(N) – BE(O) = 3.535974
19. C
3 e2
6
Li 6.015123 u = [8(7)–7 (6)] R = 3.42 fm
3
4
5 4 ε 0 R
2
He 4.002603 u
2
1
H 2.014102 u
6 2 4
23. C
3 Li 1H + 2 He
(Not possible) 64 = 26
less more
mass mass the material should decay for 6 half
210 1 209
lines for a safe laboratory.
Po H + 83 Bi
84 1
(Not possible) Thus answer = 18 × 6 = 108 days
less more
mass mass
24. 9
2 4 6
1 H + 2 He 3 Li
more less (Possible) * 0
mass mass –1
70 82
30 Zn + 34 Se 64
152
Gd 4.041MeV
less more (Not possible)
mass mass Suppose – has (KE)max. = k
Total energy released, E = 931 (m) MeV
20. A Mass defect, m = (12.014 – 12) 931.5
210 206
= 13.04 MeV
84 Po 82 Pb + 24He
Now, E = 4.041 + K
M = 0.005818 u
K = E – 4.041 = 9 MeV
( M)c2 = 5.419467 MeV ~ 5420 KeV
206
K(Alpha) = (5420)
210
= 5316 KeV ~ 5319 KeV